The Story Of An Hour Essay Essay Help Site:edu

“The story of an hour” is a literary fiction written by Kate Chopin. Kate Chopin (1850-1904) was well known American writer of short stories. She is best known for her recurrent theme on the status of women in societal affairs, the challenges and problems facing them as well as repression and gender bias.

“The story of an hour” is rhetorically hour’s recount of the marriage life of Mrs. Louise Mallard. The text describes the final hour of her life spent dreaming about how she would become totally free from marital repression she has been experiencing under her domineering husband Mr. Brently Mallard. Mallard’s only way to acquire this freedom is through the misleading message told her that her oppressor (husband) is dead.

She will now live freely and fulfill her feminine ambitions joyfully through the remaining part of her life. However, this ends up becoming tragic to her in a sudden anti climax when she unfortunately looses her own life instead of celebrating the freedom that comes with widowhood because her husband was still alive after all.

The story is an example of literary fiction, since it economical in structure with few characters. Characters are few in this text with the main character being Mrs. Louise Mallard who is a very attractive young woman and grieves the apparent death of her husband but inwardly celebrates the freedom that she will enjoy in the days to come after his departure; and her husband Mr. Brently Mallard who is portrayed as being overbearing and repressive to his wife; other characters include Josephine who is a friend to Mrs. Mallard, Richards a friend to Mr. Mallard and the Doctors who give a wrong diagnosis of the death of Mrs. Mallard later in the end. Josephine and Richards are the ones who help break the news that Mr. Mallard is dead.

Chopin adopts a summative approach in that events unfold in one place (the Mallard’s house); everything happens within a span of less than one day at a specific location with absolutely no sub plots to develop the story further.

The author adopts a nineteenth century setting in America and recounts the events in the Mallards household within a span of one hour. Thematically, the story explores the status of a typical American woman in the nineteenth century where aspects such as female repression and male dominance were rife.

Within the nineteenth century setting in America, society was biased against women and the girl child. The place of a typical woman was expected to be the kitchen where she was entitled to take care of the entire household, bear children for the man and take care of them to maturity.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More During this period, women had no rights to vote and participate in the nation’s democratic processes, employment opportunities were skewed against them to an extent that it was not easy for them to access paid jobs and even if they managed to get such jobs, they could only be hired for a pittance to earn much less than their male counterparts for similar work. Hence, Mr. Mallard being a typical husband in the 19th century clearly dominates his wife.

In conclusion it is evident that in the 19th century women never had freedom; they were never granted an opportunity to accomplish what they wanted because societal values were skewed and sexist. Domestic roles are what they were identified with and what consumed their entire life on earth. Freedom was never forthcoming as is revealed in the ironic fate of Mrs. Mallard who looses her own life trying to secure a better one. This was the fate of the female gender during this time.


Why do Americans prefer Imported Cars? Term Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

By all standards, it is clear that USA is the single largest consumer market for automobiles in the world. In addition to the country having a high level of income, it also has a large population meaning that demand for cars is high. Over the years, there has been a misconception that the US invented the car.

However, it is Karl Benz a German who in the year 1885 registered the first vehicle patent. In subsequent years though, it is the Americans who provided the market incentives making car making a fully fledged industry. Historically, Americans preferred large, fast and powerful cars.

This made the American car manufacturers manufacture cars in line with these market requirements. In the last three decades, the dominance of American cars in the US has been constantly declining as Germany and Japan developed more affordable and high quality cars (Marr, par1). In the last two years, the industry was almost on its knees as a result of the global financial crisis. So why do Americans prefer imported cars?

Fewer errors during manufacture

It has been a widely shared opinion that cars made by American Manufacturers are more problematic when the leave the show rooms when compared to Japanese or German cars. According to experts, a local car has about 20% higher chances of being faulty than foreign cars.

This raises issues of quality control in manufacture and the American consumer is left with little option other than purchase imported cars. A new car buyer may have to spend the first few months trying to fix minor problems such as malfunctioning power windows and a faulty CD player. There have been improvements but in relation to other cars, they remain significantly problematic (Jajko, par7).

Long lasting

In general American cars are not designed to last as long as most foreign cars. Experts assert that a consumer can get between 200,000 and 400,000 mileages from a Japanese car worth the same as an American car which can only deliver 100,000 miles. Consequently, many American consumers would rather get value for their money by purchasing foreign cars which will last longer and give them less trouble.

Efficient designs

American cars are not only expensive but are grossly inefficient especially in fuel consumption. In the last two decades, the cost of fuel has been on the increase meaning that the pinch on the consumers pocket has gotten bigger by the years.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The implication of this is that preference among consumers has changed from the big, luxuries, expensive and high fuel consuming vehicles to smaller more fuel efficient models. Technological advancement has enabled Japanese car manufacturers to include features previously available in the luxurious cars in the smaller cars making them almost equally as good. This means that Americans can enjoy all the luxury and still spend less.


It is also clear that imported cars offer a wider variety than American cars. Toyota has a countless number of car models developed for numerous different uses. This added flexibility offers customers a wider range of choices which gives them more confidence in the fact that they will get what they really want with little limitation of what is in the market.

Lagged response to market changes

Recent years have proven that American automakers can also make smaller fuel efficient cars. Manufacturers such as Ford and Chevrolet have successfully developed small cars which have been well received in the market. What seems to be the problem is the lagged response to changes in the market. American automakers have been sluggish in responding to changes in preferences as a result of gas prices as well as environmental concerns (Rozema, par9).


A general and historical perception of the American car industry has been the most important factor undoing the gains made in the industry. It has become very difficult for consumers to do away with the combined notion that American cars are generally of poorer quality than foreign cars. Consequently, even the local car models which match foreign models receive much less attention.

In conclusion, it is clear that Americans have enough reasons to prefer foreign cars as demands of modern times take toll on the market. However in recent times Toyota which is the largest supplier of foreign cars in the US has had serious problems requiring massive recalls which have dented their image. It however remains unclear what the effect on local industry sales will be.

Works Cited Jajko, Keith. Why don’t people buy American cars anymore? Helium. 2009. Web.

Marr, Aliyah. Buy What’s Best. 2009. Web.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Why do Americans prefer Imported Cars? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Rozema, Ben. Why do Americans Prefer Foreign Automobiles? 2010. Web.


A quantitative and qualitative analysis of Coca-Cola and Pepsi as investment opportunities Report (Assessment) best college essay help

Table of Contents Discounted Cash Flow model

Dividend Discount model

The Earnings Growth Model


Reference List

The main aim of this report is to identify and analyze two major companies in the soft drinks industry and make a recommendation on which of them can be considered for investment purposes. The use of various stock valuation models will be applied to quantitatively analyze the financial stability of these companies and their common stock markets performance. All information about the companies is sourced from Edgar and other sites that provide financial information.

Ruback (1995) notes that “Coca-Cola and Pepsi have been rivals in the soft drink market for over a century and both companies enjoy a high degree of brand recognition globally whereby Coca-Cola is the largest manufacturer and distributor of non-alcoholic beverage concentrates and syrups in the world.”

It also has other small businesses under it like; bottling and canning operations. Anuar (2007) observed that “The company(coca Cola) is a multi-international and all its products are grouped into eight businesses to include: Africa, Eurasia, European Union, Latin America, North America, Pacific, Bottling Investments, and the Corporate.” The products are marketed and sold in more than 100 nations globally and consist of: Coca-Cola, Crush, Sprite, Fanta, Dasani water Fruitopia, Minute Maid juices.

Aswath, (2007) notes that “Pepsi is a leading global snack and beverage company; it manufactures, markets, and sells a variety of salty, convenient, sweet and grain-based snacks, carbonated and non-carbonated beverages and foods. The company operates in 200 countries outside the U.S. and Canada and gets revenues from four of its major businesses.”

Pepsi has also largely benefited from its merges with Frito-Lay and Quaker Oats, by acquiring its businesses ,the company revenues have shot upwards a factor that has also led to its stocks gaining value and hence investors can be recommended to invest in Pepsi.

“Coca-Cola’s stock was trading at an average valuation of $45.00 dollars per share in 2003, almost getting to $50.00 dollar, a very high value where it went ahead and shot further to $59.33 in the year 2008. But this can be considered as a drop compared to the $100.00 dollar price range in the 1990’s.” (Copeland


SWOT Analysis of GM Report (Assessment) college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Strengths




Strengths GM, based in Detroit, is the second leading auto producer after Toyota. It was founded in 1908 and has been a market leader on a global scale for close to 80 years. One of GM’s strength is that it operates different brands i.e. Chevrolet, Hummer and Cadillac in America. This makes it easier for it to penetrate the market; furthermore, the company has other brand and subsidiaries worldwide. GM has guaranteed its global presence by entering into partnerships with different companies such as Daewoo.

It has also enhanced the levels of cooperation with Isuzu and Suzuki. It is not forgotten that GM has manufacturing ventures with different companies, like Renault. GM also has advanced technology cooperation with Daimler, BMW and Toyota. The company has close to 200, 000 employees worldwide with manufacturing and assembly plants in 34 countries. These contribute to its penetration of the market.

Weaknesses GM pays remarkably high additional benefits to its employees. These amounts are much higher than what their competitors pay. With all other factors constant, they spend much more than their rivals such that a weaker balance sheet is guaranteed.

Union agreements have also made GM absorb many employees thus a large workforce that may at times be redundant. Since general motors manufacture up to 70% of the spare parts used during assembly, they end up with higher unit prices since they have to recover their investment in the parts and the assembled vehicles.

Their competitors buy ready made parts from other dealers and may bargain for discounts during purchase, thus a lower vote head. GM has outdated information structure that cannot be used effectively to communicate with each other. They should embrace Internet connectivity and use it to provide a host of other products. GM should also diversify its products. Great emphasis has been placed on motor vehicle production and sale thus limiting market growth.

Opportunities The company has a chance to improve on its current status in the market. This is because they have strong market bases in America, Germany, UK, Canada, China, Brazil and Italy. These markets have not been largely infiltrated by other automobile brands. GM should therefore, rethink and redesign its products in order to penetrate these markets.

While individual buyers may not have a lot of power against such a large manufacturer, collectively buyers have enormous influence on the market trends hence may affect line success or failure. Taking this into account, GM should make customer satisfaction a priority.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Threats The biggest threat to GM is in the developing world, where brand loyalty is not existent, and shopping habits are determined by price. The business was out of touch with the customer wishes thus manufacturing expensive units that could not be easily sold. This was the principal contributor to the company’s failure, as the units consumed more fuel, in addition to the, high purchase and maintenance prices. Workers may use their unions to extract proceeds from the company during the procurement of spare parts, a necessity for car assembly.

As opposed to the United States, emerging markets have alternatives to car possession, like public transport, walking or biking. Purchasing vehicles is not a necessity in such settings. It is notable that vehicle purchasing is determined by complementary factors, including fuel prices, availability of space for parking, communications and insurance. Any deficiency or lack of access to the above mentioned privileges may negatively affect vehicle purchase.


Can Cell Phones Close Digital Divide? Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Health Issue



Reference List

Health Issue Cell phones are important gadgets in today’s communication industry. From business environments to office communication, cell phones have made life easier and more comfortable. With the wide application of cell phones, the world has now become a global village.

Nevertheless, there are disadvantages associated with the use of mobile phones. For example, it is obvious cell phones emit radiofrequency energy- radio waves, dangerous to human bodies. Nonetheless, research carried out by scientists does indicate that, the amount of radiofrequency energy radiated by cell phones is very insignificant to cause tissue heating or augment body temperature.

On the other hand, there has been concern as to whether, radiofrequency energy from cell phones pose a cancer risk to cell phone users. Currently, scientists all over the world are busy carrying out research to identify the effect of cell phones in brain tumors, the central nervous system and other sites of the head and neck. This is because; these areas might be vulnerable to attack from radio waves as cell phone users hold cell phones, just below the head when communicating.

Interestingly a research study carried out by various bodies indicates that; although there are diverse cell phone radio wave effects in human bodies, radiation from cell or mobile phones have no new effects excluding the most common brain, glimoa and meningioma. It therefore poses serious concerns regarding the friendliness of to human bodies. (Cardias, 2007, pp. 642-656).

Analysis Mobile phone use started in Europe in 1980s and spread to United States. At present, the number of people in possession of cell phones around the globe is by far very high. Nevertheless, with so many people now owning and using mobile phones, there has been varied concerns on the dangers of cell and mobile phones to human bodies.

It went down into historical books to note that, the number of mobile phone subscribers in United States of America rose tremendously to reach 285 million people, in what the Cellular Telecommunication and Internet Association termed, tremendous growth. However, the high number of mobile subscribers need protection from radiofrequency energy radiated by cell phones although no research indicates whether, it is harmful or not.

There is concern as to whether cell and mobile telephones cause certain types of cancer or other health related problems. Indeed, cell phones emit radio waves (radiofrequency energy), which are dangerous to human bodies. This form of radiation has been under study for years, and some research indicates that, radiofrequency radiation has possible effects to exposed human bodies. (International Agency for Research on Cancer, 2008, pp. 1-4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Radio waves or radiofrequency energy is a type of electromagnetic emission characterized by substantive amount of penetrative power. Electromagnetic radiations or emissions fall into two groups.

The first category of ionizing radiations comprise of radiofrequency energies that penetrate into bodies with ease because of their high frequency. On the other hand, there are low-frequency radiations where radio waves fall and have low penetration power due to non-ionizing upshot. Owing to low spectrum frequency, radio waves fall under non-ionizing electromagnetic radiations.

Without question, radiations that cause ionization for example, x-rays can sometimes be a source of cancer if there is direct exposure to such sources. However, this can take a different dimension in the case of radiofrequency. It is not yet clear as to whether radiofrequency radiations from mobile or cell cause health problems or cancer simply because, the penetrative power of this radiation is too low to cause such a big health effect.

Unfortunately, research indicates that, radiofrequency radiations from mobile phones do not cause tissue heating nor do they increase body temperature. This is the reason as to why; researchers must carry out thorough research to identify the real effect of cell phone radiofrequency energy to human bodies. (Cardis,, 2007, pp. 658-664).

The antenna of the cell or mobile phone is the one responsible for radiofrequency emissions. What makes mobile or cell phone users more vulnerable to radio wave attack from cell phones is when using it. Normally, a user holds the cell or mobile telephone just against one side of the head just right at the ear. Although with low frequency, if the device is placed very close to the human body, for example the head, there is high probability of the body interacting with emitted radiations.

This means, although radio waves are low-ionizing radiations, they are powerful when the source of interaction is close. Placing a hand-held mobile or cell phone antenna close to the head exposes the head near to radiations hence; interactions leading to health problems or cancer.

On the other hand, if a person places the cell or mobile phone antenna far away from the body or head, the degree of radiofrequency energy absorption decreases. In essence, it is the strength of the signal that determines the concentration of the cell or mobile telephone’s radio frequency energy. (U.S. Food and Drug Administration, 2009, Para. 1-12).

We will write a custom Essay on Can Cell Phones Close Digital Divide? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Many people wonder how a cell phone emits radiofrequency, which then make them vulnerable to radio wave attack. What happens is that, when a mobile or cell phone user decides to call another user, the mobile phone sends a signal to the available mobile base station via the antenna. At the transceiver base station, routing takes place. The receiver takes the air signal and converts it into a digital form before sending it the switching center.

At this stage, it is now the role of the switch to connect another subscriber through the available system. It is advantageous to cell phone users who find themselves far away from the transceiver base station because; it is the distance that determines the radiofrequency energy exposure hence, the resultant effect on the user. (Ahlbom A, Green A, Kheifets L, Savitz D, Swerdlow A, 2004, pp.1741-1754 ).

Other factors which determine cell phone user’s level of exposure include, the intervals of picking or making calls, how far or near the user is from the base station, the strength of the signal transmitted, the bulkiness of the mobile handset and in this case its antenna, and the availability of hand-held devices.

Different firms for example, Interphone under the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) consortium, carried out research to identify the extent of damage caused on malignant and benign brain tumors exposed to radiofrequency energy. The results from Interphone did indicate that, there is no increased malignant or benign brain tumor risk apart from the existing glioma and meningiosa brain tumor effects.

Furthermore, the research did not find substantive evidence linking lengthy calling time, very many calls or many years with cell phones as risks to cell phone users. However, cell phone users who had spent a lot of time making phone calls through their cell phones, risked glioma. This led many people to question the whole report. (International Agency for Research on Cancer, 2008, pp. 1-7).

In 2004, there were divergent views from countries that participated in the Interphone case study. For example, the Danish report cited acoustic neuroma as an effect resulting from exposure to radiofrequency energies for a period exceeding ten years as compared to short-term cell phone users.

Additionally, the report indicates that, there is no increased risk on places where users held their cell phones. On the other hand, the Swedish report, which examined short and long-term mobile users, cited that, there was increased risk of acoustic neuroma only to long-term mobile phone users.

On the other hand, a data report complied by Norway, Sweden, United Kingdom Denmark and Finland went contrary to previous reports linking long time exposure to radiofrequency energy with acoustic neuroma. Instead, the report cited that, there is high risk to the tumor exposed to the cell phone for over ten years.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Can Cell Phones Close Digital Divide? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Interestingly, later studies and even the current one, cite similar findings as of these countries. Nevertheless, even with contradicting reports, cell phone users are greatly concerned whether the tumor of their head exposed to mobile phones will eventually have health problems. Some time later, Interphone Danish and Swedish researchers carried further research on the relationship between meningioma or glioma risk and mobile or cell phone use.

However, in research carried on disease-free individuals, these researchers found that, there is no link whatsoever, between cell phone use and meningioma or glioma. United Kingdom and Nordic Countries released the same results that concurred with that of Swedish and Danish researchers although for them, glioma can occur on the side of head exposed to mobile handsets for a period of at least ten years. (Hepworth, 2001, pp. 837-887).

It is evident that, research carried by different counties gave varied results. In a calculate move aimed at curtailing biases resulting from case-control studies, a consortium of researchers identified 420,095 cell and mobile phone users in Denmark and then made a comparison with Danish Cancer Registry in order to categorize the number of people suffering from brain tumors as a result of using cell phones.

Their research indicated that, radiofrequency energy from cell phones has nothing to do with meningioma, acoustic neuroma or glioma irrespective whether the subscriber had used the cell phone for ten or more years. In other words, exposure to radiofrequency energy whether for long or short time or high frequency, do not necessarily lead to cancer or healthy problems.

With great concern among mobile phone users, more companies and consortium bodies continued to carry out related research. For example, between 1987 and 2002, the National Cancer Institute (NCI) under the umbrella of Epidemiology and End Results Program (SEER) and the Surveillance Consortium, carried out cell phone risk research to identify the effects of radiofrequency energy emitted by cell phones to brain tumors and the nervous system.

The results however indicated that, there had been no damage to these areas notwithstanding, the increase in cell phone use. These two bodies continue to carry out periodic research to identify whether, cell or mobile telephones participate in nervous system or brain tumor damage especially now, when mobile use is on the rise in United States.( Inskip, Tarone,


Technology and Music Industry Essay best college essay help

Introduction This paper explores the relationship that exists between the music industry and technology. The paper highlights the positive and negative impact of new technological developments on the recording industry. These developments have largely influenced the way music is produced and disseminated.

Over the years, technology growth especially in information sector has enabled easier sharing of music across the world on a variety of platforms. From the discussions in this paper, it is clear that both artists and end users have benefited from technological advancement. However, with increasing development in technology, artistes continue to be disadvantaged as end users find new ways of side stepping industry channels.

How technology is killing recording industries Technology has been applauded all over the world as a tool that helps to simplify work. Technology makes operations simple as it enables for automation. When processes are automated, it is easier to work the systems. For organizations and for individuals, technology continues to provide for enhanced reliability, efficiency and security in their operations.

Technology is known to spur and stimulate growth and development hence providing an enabling environment for human fulfillment. Through use of technological tools, individuals and organizations are able to improve business transactions (Burgess 55).

The music recording industry has not been left behind in appreciating use of technology to enhance business. Technology, despite its positives, has in various ways impacted negatively on operations in the industry (Burgess 59). The internet radically changed the way musicians sell and market their music.

Through the internet, some musicians have made enough sales or adequately popularized their music. However, as more users got internet smart, they have been using the internet to download genuine music from artistes illegally. Illegal downloads using the internet has cost the recording industry millions of money. Apart from the illegality of download, many music merchandisers have lost their jobs as music is easily downloaded from the internet.

Piracy Technology has made it easy to reproduce or produce music. Due to efficiency in music production, more music recordings can be produced. On the negative side, some people have mastered the art of illegally reproducing music and selling. This kind of engagement is called piracy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Piracy confused and corrupted the music industry environment worldwide. Generally, the internet has radically changed how music is sold around the world; Music is readily accessible on the internet (Burgess 66). E-processes have been an advantage to both the buyers and the artistes because it promotes faster selling and access. Pirates have invaded the industry; these are people who want to benefit more than the real artiste and the recording industry at large.

Piracy has arisen due to innovation that involves compression and e-distribution of music file across the internet (Scott 54). When one manages to access music online and subsequently downloads the same without permission from the owner, this is actually stealing. Piracy as an activity is an illegal activity that leaves artistes and other players in the music industry demoralized. Demoralized music industry players often are more likely to do shoddy jobs than to engage in real creative work for their fans (Burgess 79).

Artistes and recording companies loose sales to piracy because there are many cheap counterfeit CDs being sold on streets around the world. Secondly, losses are recorded from internet piracy whereby sophisticated software is used to stream the music (Scott 75). Piracy involves using different wayss to have a copy of favorite music without paying for the same.

CD pirating has gained strength due to the introduction of CD-Recordable device. This is a home recording device, which can easily copy music and other audio onto a blank CD. The recording device is commonly referred to as a burner because of the technology involved in transferring image to the CD (Scott 109).

Mp3 music Trading

Mp3 is a new technology that encourages music piracy around the world. Mp3 is a short form of MPEG- layer 3. MP3 involves compression of music files while keeping exact quality. The compression of music to smaller size has encouraged activities of many pirates (Wang 33).

File Sharing

File sharing involves private and public sharing of data stored in a computer system or a space on a network. This is done using different levels of user access rights. File sharing facilitates a number of people to access a given file and basing on the privileges bestowed on a file, they can copy, modify or read (Wang 88).

The impact of file sharing technology in the music industry has been a major obstacle to its advancement. File sharing has led to decrease in sales as individuals share files instead of buying new music CDs. People who engage in file sharing do so innocently assuming it is harmless. File sharing and its usage online have facilitated reduced probability of people purchasing music. Most people have preferred online file sharing instead of traditional CD purchase.

We will write a custom Essay on Technology and Music Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The recording industry is in itself to blame for street piracy and related internet piracy (Wang 93). Due to selling original music exorbitantly, people resort to counterfeit in streets. In the 1980’s most recording companies were persuading the public to buy the digital compact disk, however, an adamant public stuck with LP and cassette.

CD sales were not as promising as the industry expected. Most major labels in the 1980s came up with a strategy of compelling their customers and retailers to desist from carrying the LPS due to the magnitude of records being released into the market. They came up with a strategy of liberally recording (Wang 123). CDS were known to be better than the cassette in areas of portability and quality of sound and were thus adopted in place of LPs.

Modern Labels Modern labels have changed the way and means of producing and distributing music. The changes in ways of music production and distribution have created a shift in individual artiste engagement of the market. Technology has lowered the cost of production. As a result, individual artistes can now produce themselves easily. Individual artistes no longer see the need of signing big contracts.

The current changes enabled by technology allow modern labels enough flexibility and more prospects (Wang 147). Technology, therefore, does not just mean more money in the banks but also easier production and more creative solutions.

Technology and Success in the Music recording industry Technology has transformed the music industry in awesome ways. Initially it was hard for them to find and nurture young talents. Additionally, managing the production of a given record was a nightmare. For artists, before technological advancement recording was not easy as one had to book a studio, hire qualified producers. Once produced, it was never easy to do promotion and distribution of the finished record.

In today’s technological world, artists can easily introduce themselves to producers. All an artiste needs is a laptop, correct equipment and a recording program. The artiste can easily do a sample recording at the comfort of the house and send the sample to producers or carry out the whole project on her own. As concerns the distribution and promotion of produced music, social networking sites such as MySpace and iTunes are easy to upload and promote music on (Scott 206).

MySpace has, launched many successful careers in music and has facilitated many artistes to get recording contracts. iTunes music store has made it easy for anyone to get an album by simply filling out some forms and sending them to apple for verification i.e. to determine if they meet the needed standard.

TV and Radio has played a pivotal role in providing avenues for the promotion of music industry; in particular artiste and their albums. TV and radio helps in advertising and giving air play to music of different artistes. Through personal interviews on radios and television programs artistes and recording companies are able to advertise themselves. Through new media channels especially blogging, artiste continue to have close to real time interaction with their fans and customers.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Technology and Music Industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More CDS are slowly being edged out because of new technological developments. The place of CD players is slowly but sure being taken over by the iPod. In a clearer way, the future purchase and sale of music is anticipated to be easier (Cusic 90).

It is anticipated that in the next ten years, the CDS will be replaced by small wireless hard drives, which can hold enormous amounts of data. The devices of the future will also have the capability of connecting to iTunes.

Internet entrepreneurs have found great ventures in the recording and music distribution world. Most recording companies have to understand e-commerce if they are to remain relevant and generate revenue (Burgess 196). A label which fails to have a web will tend to fail. Technology gives everyone the power to almost engage in everything. For an artist, the recorded changes in the industry mean that coming up with a profitable album does not really need many people, it only needs correct use of technology.

Fighting Piracy Anti-piracy campaigns have found support in most governments around the world (Burgess 189). The integration of anti –piracy forensic technology by most recording industries has been a milestone to ensure that the industry continues to increase their revenues.

At the same time, use of such software helps in protecting organizational privacy, which is necessary for every organization. The technology assists authorities to identify the origin of pirated CDs (Burgess 167). Through tracking, pirates who reproduce music can easily be identified. The technology is widely useful in protecting recording industries that utilize optical CD formats.

Conclusion The music recording industry plays a vital role in helping young and upcoming artiste to be nurtured and be able to shine in their chosen career. However, the industry has to develop strategies in order to stay ahead of music piracy. Legislation and adoption of or creation of sophisticated production technology is the sure way to beating piracy.

Secondly, each organization must have security measures, which the pirates will find hard to crack. Moreover, the industry should work hand in hand with the law enforcers to apprehend and ensure those who are caught pirating or with counterfeit goods are held accountable by facing the full wrath of law.

On the other hand, recording companies should consider applying appropriate technology such as online music sales. Digital downloads should be encouraged but precautions concerning security and copyright issues should be well outlined and elaborated so as to guard against piracy. The future of the music industry will be more promising depending on the choices the players in the industry are making.

Works Cited Burgess, Richard James. The Art of Music Production. London: Omnibus Press, 2002

Cusic, Don. Music in the Market. North Carolina: Popular Press, 1996

Scott, Michael, D. Internet and Technology Law Desk Reference. New York: Aspen Publishers, 2009

Wang, Wally. Steal this File Sharing Book: What They Won’t Tell You About File Sharing. New York: No Starch Press, 2004


One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest Report custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



Suggested Treatment


Works Cited

Introduction Written by Ken Kesey in 1962, One Flew over the Cuckoo’s Nest is a masterpiece that became an immediate success after its publication.

This is a story about a mental institution where mentally sick people are confined for easy management and treatment; nevertheless, at a closer look, the story deals with issues like insurrection against conformity among others that the United States of America was grappling with during this time.

All the characters in this story have some mental defects; nevertheless, others like Chief Bromden claim to be normal but after scrutiny the reader realizes that he is suffering from a common psychological condition; paranoid schizophrenia characterized by hallucinations among others as explained later in this paper.

This paper deals with the character, Chief Bromden, his life, health, sickness and gives a diagnosis coupled with suggested treatment of his mental health condition. Bromden’s background gives insight to his possible mental health problem as exposited next.

Background Chief Bromden is the longest serving patient in this Oregon mental institution where he has been confined for the last ten years. He says, “I’m the one been here on the ward the longest, since the Second World War” (Kesey 17). As the story opens up, Bromden is paranoid, hallucinated, and ever fearing the unknown.

A fog that shields him from reality covers his life most of the time facilitated by humiliation he gets from other patients especially the “Black boys’ and Nurse Ratched popularly known as the Big Nurse. He loathes meeting the Black boys; he actually prefers to stay alone and play deaf and dumb.

As aforementioned, fear of the unknown clogs Bromden’s mind and he cannot hide it, not from the Black boys for they, “got special sensitive equipment that detects my fear…” (Kesey 3). His daily life is accustomed to bullying from the Black boys whom have nicknamed him “Chief Broom” due to his duties of mopping the floor. To confirm his suffering he says, “One swats the backs of my legs with a broom handle to hurry me past” (Kesey 3).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Bromden has every reason to be paranoid as he reveals the contents of the Big Nurse’s handbag, which she uses in her daily duties, “wheels, and gears, cogs, needles, forceps, watchmakers’ pliers, and rolls of copper wires” (Kesey 3). It is important to note that, this is a mental institution manned by the Big Nurse and the above-mentioned tools are to be used to torture patients including Chief Bromden.

On the other side, Bromden has personal issues far from the mental institution. He sees himself as a weak and small person despite the fact that he is 6 ft 8” tall. He admits that he used to be big but that is no more. His ‘bigness’ has disappeared to where he knows not. His confidence has melted away and its place taken by unfounded fear; something that he openly admits.

He tries to remember the past but it brings equal fears as the mental hospital especially when he remembers a machine he calls Combine-a dark imagination of society as a conglobation of oppressive forces. Oppression to Bromden has been around since childhood.

He recalls a time back when he was ten and some government officials visited his father, Chief Tee Ah Millatoona to discuss a possibility of buying a tribe land. Unfortunately, Bromden was alone in the house and the government officers acted as if he did not exist and this traumatized him greatly.

Moreover, Bromden is named after his mother, Mary Louise Bromden, despite the fact that he had a father and people are named after their fathers insinuating a possibility of family problems. His past has nothing to celebrate; actually, “…like always when I try to place my thoughts in the past and hide there, the fear close at hand seeps in through the memory” (Kesey 6). This is the day-to-day life of Bromden coupled with trauma from electroshock treatments he received from the Big Nurse rumored to be around 200.

Diagnosis Based on the information gathered from the background of Bromden’s life, he is suffering from paranoia also known as paranoid schizophrenia in modern psychiatry. “Paranoia is a thought process heavily influenced by anxiety or fear sometimes to the point of irrationality and delusion” (Freeman


The 360-degree Feedback System: Advantages and Disadvantages Research Paper cheap essay help

Introduction Performance management (PM) is a way of evaluating the level of an employee’s performance in workplace. Precisely, PM is “an ongoing communication process, undertaken in partnership between an employee and his/her immediate supervisor that involves establishing clear expectations and understanding several issues” (Bacal, 1999, p. 3).

The commonly used performance management tool is the 360-degree feedback system, also commonly known as multi-rater feedback or multisource assessment because in some cases it involves external organizations to carry out some analysis stages of the assessment.

Duraisingam and Skinner (2005) posit, “Any appraisal system should be relevant and applicable to everyday work, acceptable and fair, and a mutual collaboration between workers and employers” (p. 2) and 360-degree feedback complies with this observation. Just as the name suggests, 360 degrees is a circle with each arc of the circle representing an element of the employee under evaluation who sits at the centre of the circle.

How 360 – Degree Feedback Works This model operates in a rather simple manner. The evaluating company puts individuals in groups within different departments after which they are required to fill questionnaires or forms answering specific questions as indicated in figure 1 below.

The exercise takes less than twenty minutes; however, it is important to note that the figures used vary depending on the element and content of evaluation; it may be larger or smaller. The participating people maybe one’s peers, managers, or external individuals like suppliers, customers, or stakeholders among others.

Results from the participants are sent to another company, which analyses the information presented in the results to draw conclusions. After this analysis, the analyzed results are sent back to the evaluating company for discussion to chart the way forward and implement the appropriate measures. Nevertheless, this evaluation tool is not perfect thus; it has both merits and demerits.

Example of a 360-Degree Feedback Form Insert your own Feedback Form headings and instructions: appraisee name, date, feedback respondent name, position (if applicable) plus local instructions and guidelines for completion, etc. key skill/capability area skill/capability element question number feedback question feedback score 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Optional section: additional feedback about the appraisee – please be constructive Figure 1: 360 – Degree Feedback. (Chapman, 2005).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Advantages and Disadvantages of this Tool The advantages of this tool outweigh the disadvantages. The crucial advantage of this tool is, “it provides a wider view of worker’s performance as compared to the other appraisal tools (Atkins


Perspectives of Behaviorism by Watson, Skinner, and Tolman Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

John Watson

B.F. Skinner

Edward C. Tolman



References List

Introduction Psychology is one of the most diverse and interesting fields of study given the numerous developments is has gone through starting in the nineteenth century through the twentieth century and persisted in the twenty first century, now commonly known as modern-day psychology. Of all these developments, Edward Tolman, B.F. Skinner, and John Watson made important contributions to psychology and their different perspectives have found their way into modern-day psychology.

They all studied psychology from the behaviorism perspective and even though they differed on one aspect or the other, their perspectives are rooted on behaviorism. Watson was the father of behaviorism by introducing his perspective; popularly known as, classical behaviorism. Skinner borrowed heavily from Watson but made some alterations here and there as each sought to establish his school of thought.

Tolman holds a different view of behaviorism from that of Watson and Skinner. Deviating from the other schools of thought, behaviorists hold that, “all things which organisms do- including acting, thinking and feeling- can and should be regarded as behaviors” (Mclntyre, 2003). Due to the modification, they made on Watson’s initial behaviorist observations, Tolman, and Skinner form crucial part of neo-behaviorists as exposited in this paper as it compares and contrasts perspectives of these three great psychologists.

John Watson As aforementioned, Watson was the father of behaviorism. Watson maintained that behavior resulted from motivation; that is, organisms had to be elicited to behave in a given way in response to the elicitation. In his bid to introduce and foster more objective science psychology, Watson claimed that emotions were not intrinsic, people did not just experience emotions; no, emotions were a response to provocation, later defined as stimulus.

His experiments majored on proving behind every behavior, there was a stimulus. The Little Albert experiment was one of Watson’s experiments to prove his claims.

Albert, a son to a laboratory worker would accompany his mother to a laboratory where he would play with reared rats for fun. In Watson’s view, the rats were stimulus to Albert’s playful behavior. Watson observed development of new behavior. The scary sound of hammer falling on a metal bar accompanied the presentation of rats to Albert to elicit his playful behavior. After seven consecutive presentations, Albert would cry every minute he saw the rats even after withdrawal of the scary sound (Watson


The Concept of Hinduism Religion Research Paper essay help online free: essay help online free

Hinduism can be seen as a conglomerate of several different groups but which have a very similar purpose and belief system thus appearing like a monolithic religion. There are several denominations within the Hindu religion. It is more of a family of autonomous members who share some features.

The main four of these groupings include Swami Narayana Mission, the Hare Krishna Movement, Ramakrishna Mission and Pushti Marg. They are mainly categorized in terms of their differences in worship, doctrine and preferred practices and processes.

Despite the presence of the many differences, all the different denominations share common points which define the religion. First, they share common themes. All the different denominations endorse the belief in the Brahman which is the ultimate reality seen as the universal soul as well as the individual soul called Aatman.

This is enhanced in the belief that all creatures on earth undergo a cyclical process of birth death and rebirth. The principle of Karma determines the re-birth. In addition, the entire family reveres a common deity seen as the ultimate God above the many other gods which differ among the different denominations. The God is called Brahman and is seen as the ultimate reality (Rood, 2010, par3).

Also, a vast majority of the Hindus endorse vegetarianism and the cow is considered holy thus not eaten by any of the different denominations. All the denominations also wear marks on the forehead and other body parts. They also share a sacred symbol representing Brahman and called Aum.

Also, there are six basic schools of philosophy guiding all the different groupings namely yoga, Nyaya, Samkhya, Vaishseshika, Purva Mimasa and Uttara Mimamsa (Vedanta). Other areas of convergence include the search of an awareness of God and the search of different blessings from different gods. The religion is generally a form of idol worship.

There are several influences which made the Hindu religion important and useful for the region of Origin. The first and most critical element of the religion is its ability to unite and incorporate different beliefs as well as practices. During the time of inception, India which is the origin of the religion had very different cults having significantly diverse systems of belief and bringing them together requires a great deal of accommodation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This was a critical element which led to the unity of India in those early days and enables the country to continue through the path historically. This formed the most important basis for the government to support Hinduism and in the process fight Islam and Christianity as they require a high degree of uniformity which would largely destroy the varied beliefs and practices.

These traditions were viewed as the most important resource for the country. This can be proven through a current day comparison between India and Pakistan. In India, Hindus who form the majority live in peace with Muslims while Pakistani Muslims make it hard for the Hindus (Hinduism Beliefs, 2010, par5).

In addition, the insistence on vegetarianism forms an important contribution to the people. In early days the cow was a very important resource and remains the same even in modern villages. Bull ploughed land facilitating food production. Cows gave milk which offered crucial nutrients for the people.

Cow dung was also useful as fuel as well as medicines. Also, the caste system characteristic of the Hindu religion offered a very effective design for working. It provided a very viable system for co-existence among Indians. This being the case, India would have become very different if it adopted a religion with a narrow focus on the universal way rather than the individual.

Hinduism advocates for the desire for liberalization from earthly experience. The interpretation of this liberalization is freedom from all bondage and ignorance. Bondage and ignorance result from the natural pattern of thinking using the mind and in consideration of the different personalities.

The religion invokes the fact that human ego can never get fully satisfied especially in one lifetime and there is the need for blessings for full satisfaction. The worldly systems only offer experiences and excitement with a definite ending. But the people get weary of these experiences with time and the universal way offers an infinite self whose experience never grows weary. Advocacy is towards transcending the ego which results in a librated soul (Hinduism, 2010, par4).

This liberated soul is said to enjoy “peace which surpasses all understanding”. It enables individuals to enjoy life rather than take it too seriously and miss out. This being the case, any loss or even death cannot affect the liberated soul as the individual has reached a state where he/she is free from any form of suffering resulting from the physical world.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Concept of Hinduism Religion specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, Hinduism is an effective religion when viewed from the cultural origin and the element of inclusion which enables diversity. This has enabled it to tie together countries like India. The concept of a liberated soul is critical in propagating prosperity and calm even in the midst of troubles.

Reference List Hinduism Beliefs, 2010. The Origin of Hinduism. Web.

Hinduism, 2010. What Makes Up Hindu Religion? Web.

Rood, R.2010. Hinduism. Available at:


Abortions Legal in the U.S.A Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Arguments for Abortion



Introduction Human life has been held in high esteem and indeed one of the founding principles of our country is the inalienable rights to life and freedom for all. However, as our society has advanced through the years, the issue of abortion which is defined by Alters (2006) as “a procedure performed to end a pregnancy before birth occurs” has become predominant. While some people view abortion as benevolent, others view it as an evil which should be purged from the society.

Anti-abortionists declare that this procedure is a violation of the rights to life for all individuals while advocates of the same concur that it is a personal choice which should be left to the discretion of the individual. These controversies have led to the calls for making abortions illegal in the country. In this paper, I shall argue that abortions should remain legal since they safeguard the health of women and lead to improvement of life for the society at large.

Arguments for Abortion Statistics indicate that in places where abortions are not legal, illegal abortions are performed mostly by quack doctors in unhygienic conditions greatly threatening the life of the women undergoing the procedure. NARAL (2009) indicates that the decriminalization of abortions in the US has resulted in the protection of women’s health since the procedures are undertaken in proper medical surroundings which results in fewer deaths and complications.

It is therefore evident that the legalizing of abortions is beneficial since it safeguards the health of the woman. However, opponents of abortion assert that abortions may have far reaching consequences including the loss of ability to bear children in future. Studies indicate that this argument is faulty since abortion rarely impacts a woman’s fertility or predisposes the woman to complications in future pregnancies (NARAL, 2009).

Ideally, conceptions should happen with the mutual consent of both people involved. However, this is not always the reality and in some cases, conception occurs under distressing circumstances such as rape and incest.

Studies indicate that women who are pregnant as a result of rape often apply their negative feelings against the rapist on the child leading to bad parenting if the pregnancy is allowed to run its full course (Farrell, 2008). As such, abortion in these cases may result in better psychological health of the woman since after the abortion, the woman can begin the healing process.

Anti-abortion activists on the other hand show that abortion in rape cases may not alleviate the trauma caused by rape but rather increase the psychological burden on the rape victim (Farrell, 2008). While this may be true in some instances, forcing a rape or incest victim to carry a pregnancy to completion against her will lead to greater psychological damage. Abortion therefore presents the better means for future coping with the trauma caused by rape.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Abortions are sometimes performed on purely economic considerations. This is the case when an expectant woman hails from a poor background and does not have the means to support a child. In such a case, letting the pregnancy run its full cause will result in a baby who the mother cannot adequately care for. Such babies will therefore be dependent on the society and the government to fend for them. Naden (2007) notes that abortions on economic grounds are beneficial to individual women and families and the larger economy.

Anti-abortion activists argue that life is sacred and aborting on economic grounds is tantamount to killing poor people so as to eradicate poverty in the world. However, Alters (2006) demonstrates that abortion is not equivalent to killing since the fetus is not an individual by law. In addition to this, it would be cruel to bring a child into a world where one cannot adequately care for it.

Conclusion This paper set out to argue that abortions should remain legal since they are hugely beneficial to women in particular and the whole community at large. To reinforce this assertion, this paper has reviewed some of the arguments made in favor of abortions. The counter arguments offered by anti-abortion activists have also been given to provide a balanced view of the issue.

From the discussions presented herein, it is clear that making abortion illegal can only lead to greater damages to women’s health and losses for the society. As such, abortion should be kept legal for the benefit of women and the prosperity of our country.

References Alters, M. S. (2006). Abortion: An Eternal Social and Moral Issue. USA: Thomson/Gale.

Farrell, C. (2008). The Abortion Debate. ABDO Group.

Naden, J. C. (2007). Abortion. Marshall Cavendish.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Abortions Legal in the U.S.A specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More NARAL Pro-Choice America Foundation. (2009). The Safety of Legal Abortion and the Hazards of Illegal Abortion. Retrieved from:


Marketing unpopular products Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Marketing is normally directed to consumers who are willing to buy and who are also willing to consume the products being marketed. However, some products and/or services need to be pushed during marketing in order to achieve positive results. Examples of such products include products and services associated with funerals, diabetic equipment etc (Ibsen, 2008, p. 1). This paper discusses the issues that companies selling such products face and suggests some solutions to the issues.

Marketing products like coffins and diabetic equipment, and services like funeral services may prove to be a very challenging task. While the companies that provide such services need to keep their sales high, it is, kind of, unethical to go their way marketing their products and therefore such marketing campaigns may bear no fruits.

It is thus of essence that such companies adopt strategic marketing approaches suited for their industry (Johnson, 2009, p. 1). One approach that can be used to increase casket sales is the displaying of ready-made caskets so that people can know where to find them when need arises.

Companies can also design various tastes for such kinds of products to ensure that a needy customer will get the kind of good he/she wants. This is because a large number of people leave descriptions of the kind of coffins they should be buried in. Another approach that can be used is the introduction of a marketing strategy based on genuine care by the company about the misfortunes of the customers (Nam, 2004, p. 1).

For instance, an advertisement for diabetes equipment may be designed to give the patient instructions on how to keep their blood sugar levels down. This kind of concern may make customers to be interested in the products that the companies have to offer. On the other hand, coffins may be manufactured in such a way that they put in to consideration the prevailing social parameters. An example of such parameters is fashion which may extend even to the casket industry. Another social factor is culture.

Some communities bury their beloved ones in caskets that display a certain message about the lives that the diseased lived (Nam, 2004, p. 1). These coffins are thus symbolic and therefore a consideration of the cultural factor in making coffins for such communities will definitely make the marketing of coffins less challenging. An inclusion of certain specialized messages may also help to attract customers to certain goods.

For instance, a coffin with the words, “RIP my love”, (Johnson, 2009, p. 1) will most likely attract a man looking for a coffin for his wife. Such products need after-sales services because the customers who demand them are normally in problems. The companies selling such products should ensure that they do their best to be helpful to the customers and they will develop important networks this way.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are a myriad of reasons why some products may not be an “easy sell”. However, a consideration of the reasons why such products are unpopular and the incorporation of solutions for these reasons in the manufacture and marketing of these products may make the companies that deal with such products successful in their industry. It is of essence for the companies to have a thorough understanding of the feelings the customer is going through before they come up with their marketing strategies.

Reference List Ibsen, D. (2008). How to market an unpopular product. Web.

Johnson, S. (2009). Wal-Mart begins stocking coffins and funeral urns. Web.

Nam, Y. (2004). Costco begins test marketing caskets. Web.


Current and future population problems in Pakistan Cause and Effect Essay essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Current population problems in Pakistan

Causes of population problems

Solutions to the population problems in Pakistan

Future population problems in Pakistan

Strategies to avoid future population problems


Works Cited

Introduction Economic analysts and their political counterparts are yet to concur on the truth of the allegations by the Population Association of Pakistan that effective population control measures have been put in place to reduce the population problems in Pakistan.

Despite the slight decline in the total fertility of Pakistan since the start of this decade, the country still remains one of the most fertile countries in the whole world. Some demographers have associated this decline with the increasing use of methods of contraception in limiting fertility but there still exists a considerable controversy regarding the effectiveness and contribution of contraception in the relatively lower fertility rates seen in Pakistan as this decade ends.

Despite the aforementioned decline in the fertility rate of Pakistan, the country still experiences insurmountable population related-problems and stakeholders have been struggling to find an amicable solution to the problem. The future of Pakistan population therefore depends on the measures that the government and other stakeholders will take to curb the problem. Otherwise, the predictions of future population in Pakistan based on trends in the past and the present are shocking.

If nothing much is done from now on, Pakistan is expected to be one of the three most populated countries in the whole world. This paper investigates the population problem in Pakistan by suggesting the possible reasons for the current population trends, the effects they have on the country, possible solutions to the prevailing population problems and future predictions of population in Pakistan and its implications.

Current population problems in Pakistan Pakistan’s total population was more than 180 million in the year 2009 with a total fertility rate of 4.0 in the same year (Sathar 7). This can be considered to be exponential population growth if compared to the 1947 figure for total population of 33 million. Currently, more than three million children are born each year adding more people to the already unsustainable population.

Pakistan is currently the second largest contributor to global population after India. The country is estimated to currently have a population of more than 170, 000 and the current population growth rate is believed to be currently standing at a figure above 1.5% (Sathar 8). In addition to the large population that Pakistan has, it is characterized with the fastest rate of urbanization with more than 35% of its total population living in urban areas (Sathar 3).

The above mentioned population problems coupled with problems brought about by urbanization have made Pakistan to be among the countries that are most affected by population growth. This is because, large population and rapid population growth has brought problems in virtually all realms of life in this country. Examples of such problems include poverty, unemployment, political instability, illiteracy, terrorism and religious extremism etc.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Poverty is believed to have increased by 10% in the past decade hitting a total of 40% of total population (Sathar 3). This means that 40% of Pakistan residents live below the poverty line (Sathar 3). It is also estimated that virtually a half of the population in Pakistan is illiterate. This implies that in the future, poverty and child labor are expected to increase since education is the only tool that can be used to predict a better future for these people.

Additionally, those in the elite class have only acquired minimal education and they are unable to bring innovative ideas to the country. The country is thus painfully slow in its adoption of new technologies and ideas. This has led to economic degeneration and the country is, seemingly, unable to come up with measures to counteract the effects that large population size has had on its economy. The country as also suffered significant corruption and political instability due to its system of using establishments in organizations.

The country has also experienced an establishment of criminal and terrorist networks that have made it fail to qualify for investments and tourism. This is mainly due to the religious fanatics that make the most of Pakistan population. This is very unfortunate for Pakistan especially considering the fact that other countries like China are getting billions of dollars in form of foreign investment while other small countries like Philippines have a substantial amount of tourism activity and foreign investments.

Given the repercussions that these problems have had on the population of Pakistan, there is need to look into the causes of population growth and the cause of such problems in order to form effective policies that will help to end these problems. The discussion below investigates the root cause of the problems that Pakistan if facing and suggests a number of solutions that can be implemented to reduce the effects these problems have had on the people of Pakistan.

Causes of population problems The main reason why Pakistan is facing the above mentioned problems is due to the inability of the government and the population of Pakistan to effectively reduce their population growth rate.

Therefore, the main causes of the problem are the causes of inefficiency in combating population growth. The stated inability of the government and the Pakistan population to reduce their rate of population growth is due to their lack of effectiveness in implementing family planning programmes which were started in this country in the 1950’s (Hagen 1).

The stated planning programmes failed in Pakistan because of a weakness in the administrative structure these programmes were subjected to. It can be deduced from the failure of these programmes that the government did not adequately educate the public about the crucial importance of family planning and the grave repercussions of ignorance of the same.

We will write a custom Essay on Current and future population problems in Pakistan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The government therefore needs to engage itself in public awareness campaigns aimed at educating the public about the importance of small families. The government also needs to be vigilant to identify populist politicians and deal with them accordingly before they derail efforts to educate the public and eventually reduce the population growth rates.

Despite the fact that Pakistan started fighting its population growth in the 1950’s with the implementation of population control programmes, nothing much has been achieved since then.

In comparison with other countries like Bangladesh and Iran, where family planning programmes like the use of contraceptives had a dramatic effect, Pakistan has not been serious with their family planning programmes. This is because Iran started its family programme in the 1980’s while Bangladesh started their in the 1970’s and both countries realized exponential declines their fertility rates unlike Pakistan (Hagen 1).

The people of Pakistan also have a role to play in the fight against population growth. They should listen to the government and ensure that they follow the instructions they are given in order to reduce their fertility rates. This is because one of the main reasons why family planning has been ineffective in this country is the fact that the citizens of this country cling to the religious and cultural values such that they forget to mind about their welfare.

For instance, it is a religious belief in Pakistan that engaging in family planning practices is going against the will of God (Hagen 1). The ineffectiveness of family planning programmes caused by these beliefs has been the reason why population in Pakistan is always growing and bringing the myriad of problems stated in the discussion above.

Solutions to the population problems in Pakistan In order to effectively combat the population problem in Pakistan, there is need for a coherent approach aimed at removing the socio-cultural and religious stigma attached to the fight against population growth. This will help to prepare the people in Pakistan for a change to their normal life in order to achieve a productive change in the growth rate of their population.

There is also the need for implementation of a service delivery plan bound to achieve effective results throughout the entire country. The service delivery plan should be structured such that every Pakistan citizen who needs to plan his/her family will be able to access the necessary services. This is because it will be pointless to run advertisements on the television if there are no effective networks of workers on the ground to provide effective information and if there are no outreach activities (Sathar 4).

Up to today, the main reason for the failure of family planning programmes is the lack of political commitment to the issue and the lack of continuity of efforts after political transitions. If the prevailing lack of commitment to this important issue remains, change will always be evasive and Pakistan will continue to suffer the problems it currently suffers.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Current and future population problems in Pakistan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The government can also launch a programme to mitigate the effects that high population growth rates have had on the country by diverting some resources to alleviation of poverty, investing in agricultural activities to feed its citizens by increasing food security and coming up with policies to avoid formation of poor urban areas that increase poverty and crime.

To achieve this objective, the government needs to be objective since it has limited resources. For instance, to increase food security, the government may invest negligible resources in environmental conservation campaigns that will automatically lead to more agricultural activities. On the other hand, the government could alleviate poverty by subsidizing activities that lead to provision of food and educating the public on viable methods of investment.

Future population problems in Pakistan If the prevailing population growth rate in Pakistan, 2.1 percent per year, persists, Pakistan is expected to have a population of between 220 million and 250 million between the years 2020 and 2025 (Hagen 1). This will inevitably be coupled with indicators of poor human development which include low rates of economic growth, high rates of infant mortality and an amazing decline in the levels of literacy in the country.

All these poor human development indicators will be partly or fully brought by the uncontrolled population growth. It is thus deducible that a the predicted population will be very effective in undermining poverty alleviation efforts and the efforts being taken in the country to improve the standard under which the country’s population live by provision of basic necessities like water, electricity and the like.

During the same five-year period, the total fertility rate, the infant mortality rate, the crude death rate and the crude birth rate are expected to reduce to figures close to 2.7, 42.2, 5.6, and 21.4 respectively (Sathar 7). The population growth rate is also expected to reduce to 1.52 while the life expectancy of the population will be close to 72 years (Sathar 9).

The discussion above implies that there will be no pronounced effect of the drop in the population growth rate since the life expectancy has increased and the negligible increase in population growth rate will be neutralized by the aging population to keep population problems virtually constant.

This stresses the highly needed commitment to contraceptive methods and other population control methods in order to reduce the population growth rate substantially. It is only when a major reduction in the rate of population growth will be realized that we can be hopeful that population problems in Pakistan will reduce in the future.

Strategies to avoid future population problems Due to the above stated concern, the government of Pakistan has come up with population reduction policies aimed at gradually reducing the population growth rate. The government priority among its policies is the attainment of ensuring that, ten years from now, it will reach the replacement fertility level.

The above paragraph describes the intention of the government of Pakistan to reach a replacement fertility level in the year 2020 (Hagen 1). This is just a statement of what the government desires to do and without proper planning and commitment to the programmes concerned, the gravely desired decrease in the population of Pakistan will forever remain evasive.

The government of Pakistan therefore needs to integrate awareness programs with proper service delivery programs in a bid to be assured of improving the population situation in their country substantially.

The awareness programs should be aimed at ensuring that every Pakistan citizen understands that smaller families are better than larger families and helping every Pakistan citizen break cultural and social chains tying them to high fertility. The programme should be implemented to touch every part of the country and it should run for as long as the government will be assured that a family planning program will achieve substantial results.

The government should thus dedicate the minimal resources it has in this program and ensure the effectiveness of a family planning programme (Sathar 3). On the other hand, the family planning programme should be such that there is an efficient network of service delivery centers throughout the country to ensure that every part of the country participates in the efforts to reduce the population of the country.

There is also the need for the Pakistan government and public to begin realizing the importance of literacy to the alleviation of population related problem. It can, in fact, be argued that high fertility problems and problems encountered in implementing family planning programmes are due to the high level of illiteracy in the country.

If the government and its people prioritize improvement of education institutions, there can be a guarantee that the population problem and some of its resultant effects will reduce in the future. It is therefore of essence that, as it implements other solutions, the government considers revolutionizing the education system of the country since this will have positive effects on the problems the country is currently facing.

Conclusion The Pakistan government and population have encountered insurmountable problems related to their high population growth rates since the fifties. Currently, forty per cent of the people in Pakistan are below the poverty line and illiteracy and low standards of living have engulfed the country’s population for decades.

The Pakistan government and population can no longer be ignorant of the fact that the situation can be improved sacrificing their religious and cultural beliefs to have small families. For instance, if the Pakistan people abandon their belief that family planning amounts to going against the will of God, better results can be seen from family planning efforts and this will substantially reduce the population growth rate.

The government and the population need to realize that small families are needed in order to realize personal and national health. The government therefore needs to develop strategic programmes aimed at creating extensive public awareness that will make the population in Pakistan realize the importance of family planning.

This should be followed by family planning programmes which will definitely have an impact on the population growth rate since the Pakistan population will have gained an understanding of the grave importance of low birth rates. Otherwise, the existing problems of poverty, unemployment, illiteracy, etc will worsen and with time the country will fall under the weight of its sheer population size.

Works Cited Hagen, Catherine. “Pakistan Population.” Retrieved from,

Sathar, Zeba. “Fertility in Pakistan: Past, Present and Future.” 2001. Web.


Weight loss systems Research Paper argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Weight loss system

Evaluation of the weight loss system


Reference List

Introduction Obesity is one of the major health problems in the world. This problem occurs due to a variety of reasons, one of them being the diet of the affected person. Although a balance of a check on the causes of obesity is required for a person to lose weight, this paper focuses on the dietary approaches to weight loss.

Weight loss system Most obese people struggle the whole of their lives trying to lose weight due to application of ineffective weight loss systems. These systems are mostly ineffective due to the little emphasis they put on dietary weight loss methods. This is because, most obese people have a consumption problem and thus for a weight loss programme to be effective, dietary methods should be highly considered and the client must ensure that he/she abides to them.

In order to effectively shed off weight, it is necessary to watch what one eats. This is as opposed to the common belief that some diets like weight watchers and the Atkins are able to make a person lose weight effortlessly. Watching one’s diet is necessary in order to ensure a long term effect on the weight and health of the client.

Highly fatty foods as well as sweets and soft drinks should be avoided as much as possible (Kalat, 2009, p. 314). The client should also ensure that he/she only eats when driven by hunger. This is as opposed to some consumption habits in some people which are driven by cravings, the good taste of food, depression etc. Such people are highly likely to have unhealthy weight and they are also likely to have a problem obeying weight loss programmes.

If the client is such a person, he/she she will be in dire need of a therapeutic intervention to help in changing his/her motivation to eat and the system will easily help him/her. In addition to the diet, there is need for the client to maintain a positive attitude towards the weight loss system. The client should have faith that after applying the suggestions of the system, he/she will definitely lose weight.

This mental state is very important since it controls the secretion of hormones which could be very substantial in helping the client to lose weight. Furthermore, eating, drinking and their satiation effects are depended on a person’s psychology. If a person believes that he has to take three pizzas before he is satisfied, he will most likely not be satisfied after taking one pizza (Kalat, 2009, p. 544). It is therefore apparent that psychological control is essential in a weight loss system.

In summary, a weight loss system should be aimed at helping the client control his/her bad eating habits, suggesting healthy diets that he/she likes and helping him/her control his/her psychology in relation to eating habits.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Evaluation of the weight loss system The weight loss system discussed above is bound to achieve effective results due to the following reasons: the programme addresses a number of eating habits that are responsible for weight gain in most obese people and thus if an obese person or a person wishing to lose weight follows the guidelines of the programme obediently, the programme is bound to achieve its objectives.

Secondly, the programme addresses a number of factors which may make a client fail to observe its guidelines well (Glenville, 2010, p. 1). This enables people to be aware of the possible factors that may hinder them from achieving their desirable weight and thus they are prepared to observe the guidelines of the programme even in hardships.

The system is bound to have a permanent effect on the person who applies it because it teaches skills to help the person wishing to shed off weight skills to maintain weight after applying the system. It is also realistic since it highly considers the taste of the person wishing to lose weight and thus its success can be guaranteed since the person will be, arguably, comfortable with the diet suggested by the programme (Iannelli, 2003, p. 1).

I would highly recommend this programme due to its near assurance of weight loss and its characteristic sustainability. It is a good system which is likely to have no adverse effects on the life of the client and thus the client will comfortably lose weight. The programme can also be improved by incorporating the idea of exercise to its activities in order to help the client to incorporate a variety of weight loss efforts in the same system (Glenville, 2010, p. 1).

Conclusion From the discussion above, it is apparent that a weight loss programme has to have three key components for it to be effective. These are diet control, psychological control and exercise. Although much emphasis is put on the control of a person’s diet, exercises are equally important and a diet-based weight control programme is likely to have short term effects only if it does not incorporate exercises. In a nutshell, obese people wishing to lose weight should ensure that they cultivate a great deal of self control.

Reference List Glenville, M. (2010). How to lose weight naturally. Retrieved from

Iannelli, V. (2003). Weight Management Guide. Retrieved from

We will write a custom Research Paper on Weight loss systems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Kalat, J. (2009). Biological Psychology. United States. Barnes


Personal Foresight Report (Assessment) scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Introduction Personal Foresight is defined as an individual’s ability to anticipate the future (Merriam-Webster Online Dictionary, 2010). This then allows an individual to manage his or her own future based on the anticipated results of their current actions. Champions of personal foresight state that foresight does not just happen.

Rather, it is attained through innovation, identifying trends and models to be followed, analyzing the same, developing goals to be attained and developing the necessary processes to attain the goals (Smart, 2010).Personal foresight includes formulating ways and means through which a person can achieve positive results in a given social, environmental or economic environment.


But how does personal foresight develop? Well, according to Acceleration Watch (2006), futurists are more likely to develop personal foresight. The futurists are defined as people who wonder, or plan for things that they suspect will happen in future. While formal education is not a prerequisite for the development of personal foresight, Acceleration Watch (2006) observes that people who possess a wealth of personal foresight strive to be both systems thinkers and trans-disciplinary scholars.

According to Acceleration Watch (2006), there are many possible features that one can use to acquire personal foresight. Among the most dominant are innovation, thinking, and writing and analysis. A person can gain personal foresight through surveys, research, analysis, planning, argument, analogy, logic, intuition, and visioning. Prediction, scenario development and horizon scanning are also possible methods that people can use to develop personal foresight.


The benefits accrued from personal foresight are wide and varied. According to Foresight (2010), however, personal foresight allows an individual to interrogate critique and question symbolism represented in real life, hence providing them with grounds from which they can base new options.

To make an impact in the society, personal foresight can be shared with others. However, as Acceleration Watch (2010) observe, not all people choose to share what they consider as valuable insight on what should be done in the future. Instead, they construct sole projects which are either proven practical or not by the society. However, those that choose to share their foresight with other members of the society do so through theories that are discussed and either proven possible or disapproved by scholars and analysts.

There is also a possibility that foresight triggers imagination hence enabling an individual to be more innovative and imaginative. Consequently, the creativity bred by the minds of such individuals not only recognizes challenges, but also identifies the opportunities that could trigger great changes in the society.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Contribution to the public sphere

Beyond the one’s ability to contribute to the public sphere, personal foresight is essential for personal development. For example, people save for the future based on anticipated needs in the future. A parent who gives birth today knows that their child will need schooling in three or four years time, as such personal foresight allows them to plan ahead and put some money aside for the child’s schooling financial needs.

They might even start saving for the child’s college tuition fee when she/he is one year old. On the same level, a person who decides to get married and have a family understands that with family comes greater responsibility. Personal foresight gained either from his experience growing up in a family setting, observing how families are brought up, or reading about families allows him or her to prepare ahead for the anticipated family. He or she could start by getting a bigger house, which can house more than one personal and maybe a bigger bed.

Mental Models

According to Smart (2010), personal foresight also allows an individual to acquire mental models of and about the society. By gauging the requisite complexity of each of the models, one is able to understand the amount of action or attention needed in order to successfully complete the anticipated action.

According to Foresight (2010), an individual with personal foresight does not just accept reality as part of the naturalness of the world. Rather, he or she understands that the actions that people take in the present affect how the society will be in future. This means that a person with foresight understands the relationships that exist in the society and hence understands what is needed to create a comprehensive healthy future.

Notably however, though personal foresight can be gained through observation, Floyd


Global trade during the financial crisis (from 2006 to 2010) Research Paper custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The financial crisis

Effect of the crisis on global trade patterns

Global trade imbalances and the financial crisis


Works Cited

Introduction There has been considerable dynamism in global trade patterns and areas in of development of trade in which countries invest worldwide. The most recent remarkable changes occurred during the financial crisis that has dominated the better part of the second half of this decade (Whelan 3). Exporters have thus been trying to look for means of escaping the harsh effects of the crisis by the use of a variety of strategies that have seen a major shift of trade patterns.

Although the cause of the financial crisis that occurred across the world is not known for sure, global trade patterns also had its part to play as one of the causes of the financial crisis. This issue is faced with a considerable controversy but a deeper look into the economic standings of a variety of economies before and during the financial crisis has a myriad of revelations.

The financial crisis It is common knowledge that the world is currently recovering from a major financial crisis that began after the middle of this decade. This crisis was remarkably different from the normal cyclical downs due to the fact that prices and outputs fell all over the world (Bernanke 3). Such a situation had not happened in close to eight decades since the last Keynesian mode, which could be compared with the stated financial crisis, happened in the 1930’s.

However, there is an identifiable difference between the counter-measures applied in the 1930’s and those applied during the last four-or-so years. While countries raised tariffs in the 1930’s and consequently reduced trade, the recent financial crisis was characterized by a decline in trading activities brought about by a substantial decrease in world production. This crisis has had a number of other effects.

Effect of the crisis on global trade patterns The stated global financial crisis has had tremendous effects on global trade patterns. The economic struggles that economies have gone through while trying to mitigate the effects of the crisis has been very instrumental in changing the aforementioned trade patterns.

Some of the effects that this crisis has brought to the preexistent trading patterns include the beefing up of intra-regional trade which has become increasingly popular since the start of the financial crisis (Bank for International Settlements 10). This has, in turn led to growth of regional hubs, some of which have taken the global trade arena by storm. Examples of these hubs include China, South Africa, Brazil and India with the last hub growing fast to become the Asian secondary hub.

The above stated strengthening of trade within regions has led to some kind of specialization. Each of the major trade regions of the world seemed to concentrate more on a given branch of trade and give their outputs to the rest of the world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This has led to perfection of services and the trading expertise of nations hence the booming of the aforementioned regional hubs (Buiter 12). It has enhanced the preexistent scope of international trade opening better opportunities for countries that lacked the same. This kind of what can be termed as regional trade specialization is evident from the fact that most of Asia’s inputs in the global trade are due to its characteristic manufacturing capability.

On the other hand, America has grown to be very good in agriculture and it is currently operating a commendable portion of the total agricultural exchanges in the global market. Finally, Africa has, kind of, specialized in the production of supportive resources and it is bringing to the global market a variety of resources needed by a variety of industries to perform their functions.

The global crisis has also made developing countries give the best input to global trade. This is because, after the start of the recession, its effects were transmitted throughout the world by global trade with the most affected being the key players during the time (developed countries).

This led to some kind of disconnection between developing and developed countries making the developing countries experience less severe effects of the crisis. This explains why a double dip recession has fewer effects on developing countries and adversely affects developed countries. Let us now have a look at how the crisis affected the strategic positioning of some economies (Buiter 21).

India was experiencing a boom in engineering just before the financial crisis began. In the year 2005, an approximate 28% of its total manufacture exports were composed of engineering goods. To explain the reason for this trend, Indian impact of global trade on employment is determined by the elasticity of textile and engineering.

With the financial crisis, it beginning during this time, India had to invest more on engineering employment whose elasticity to trade is considerably lower in comparison to that of the textile industry (Whelan 9). There were also numerous cases of informalisation of employment due to the unpredictability of the economic situation. The geographical composition of Indian trade was also not spared.

During the financial crisis, Indian exports conformed to the prevailing global trends whereby Indian exports to western countries (developed) fell by an approximate 7 percent. Those to the developing countries rose by an approximate 10 percent with the greatest growth achieved for exports to Africa (Bernanke 11). Despite the stated rise of exports to developing countries, by the year 2009, India was still behind China, the regional hub of Asia.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Global trade during the financial crisis (from 2006 to 2010) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More At the onset o the global financial crisis, China was adversely affected with a huge drop in its GDP growth. The good thing about the Chinese government is that it took swift actions to change the situation. This was through the introduction of an expansionary fiscal policy with the pumping of a stimulus package of an approximate Rmb4 trillion into the Chinese economy.

The aforementioned policy would indubitably achieve the success it did due to the fact that China’s fiscal position is very good. This is because of the guarantee of success with increased government spending in China (Bernanke 7). Thus as long as the government can afford and as long as it is willing, it has the option of increasing its expenditure to get out of a depression.

Despite the discussed effects of the financial crisis on the Chinese economy, China has been in a different economic and financial level during the crisis as compared to Europe and the United States.

The country revolutionized its banking system by introduction of large capital and subsequent writing off of loans that were not sufficiently performing. While other systems were jeopardized during the recession, China’s banking system was virtually unaffected with an absence of common problems like a fall in monetary multiplier, liquidity shortages and occurrence of credit crunches.

Although the Chinese economy seems to have been a success during the recession, the international community has been increasingly worried that the Chinese economy could be very unstable due to its main focus on monetary policies (Buiter 22). This has made a number of investors and trade partners avoid alliance with China.

Global trade imbalances and the financial crisis The severe global crisis that is yet to bottom out spilled from the monetary sector to the actual economy, including worldwide business in manufactures, goods and services. The commencement of the current crunch can be traced back to July 2007 with the liquidity crisis due to the loss of assurance in the mortgage credit markets in the United States of America.

It was not clear at first whether the crisis could spread over to other economies (Paulson 36). The major concern was for the developing countries, whether and how they could isolate themselves from the problems originating in their largest market.

There was optimism that the problem could be restricted to monetary markets, with little effect on the actual and the rest of the world. Nonetheless, this expectation was crushed in September 2008 as the crisis got to an acute stage, with very pronounced downhill fluctuations in the stock markets, significantly reduced economic escalation rates, unpredictable exchange rates and squeezes in commodity and services demand.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Global trade during the financial crisis (from 2006 to 2010) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This led to reductions in industrial production and decreasing movements of global trade, and impacts on interrelated sectors such as transfer of expertise. The crunch was also accompanied by a rise in unemployment, with affiliated waning earnings and demand (Paulson 37).

Due to globalization, the instant the financial crunch hit the actual economy and resulted into a worldwide economic crisis, it was swiftly transmitted to many developing nations by way of reduction in trade funding and a reduction in demand affecting mutual trade movements. These effects were mostly experienced in fields dealing in global production and supply networks. Decline in demand for commodities from developing countries by the developed country markets had an adverse impact on the developing nations.

What are considered to have made the situation worse are the pronounced global trade imbalances and the absence of a strong international monetary system. A critical look at the crisis which first began in the first world economies begins by recalling the end of the worldwide system of Bretton Woods which had enabled two decades of somewhat steady global affluence and financial steadiness.

From then it has become possible to recognize an Anglo-Saxon part of the world financial system on the one hand, where economic guiding principle(s) since the commencement of the 1980s was rather successful in enhancing expansion and job creations, and a Euro-Japanese component, where growth remained slow and economic principles wavered with no defined or steady view on the way to use the greater fiscal self-sufficiency that the end of the global monetary system had made achievable (Snape 14).

The Anglo-Saxon logic at the time was for entities to take a full swing in the direction of unrestrained flow of funds and unlimited freedom to use any opportunity to achieve immediate gains. Consequently, the crisis has brought to the fore the impact of short-term aims on long-term development.

This reasoning, however, has proved to be the main driving force of the global financial system in the last three decades. Minus the towering levels of consumption in the United States, currently most of the first world and many upcoming market economies would have much lower living standards with higher unemployment rates (Bank for International Settlements 18).

Without a doubt, the high consumption levels in the United States since the beginning of the 1990s was not well financed from actual home sources. To a large extent, it was enhanced by the speculative rumors that exaggerated housing and stock markets. Growth of the actual economy and declining trends in personal income distribution led to borrowing and consumption much beyond the actual incomes in the United States and the United Kingdom due to increasing costs for housing and stocks.

End-user demand in both countries increased rapidly while at the same time family savings rates got to as low as close to zero. Thereby, the growth process got progressively frailer since it meant that many families could only manage to uphold their level of consumption by much more borrowing.

The comings into place of open markets and rising worldwide competition in the marketplace for commodities and services, the huge expenditure ultimately encouraged borrowing on global marketplaces and resulted in large current account deficits.

Some other economies of the first world were vigilant at the time against current account deficits and overspending (Bart 28). Japan, Germany and neighboring countries of the latter applied practices that brought nearly stagnant earnings and a considerable decrease in consumption levels.

However, since this strategy position also meant improved cost competitiveness, it resulted in too much export escalation and ever-increasing surpluses in current accounts, in that way piling up huge net asset positions in relation to the overspending countries. In both these cases global competitiveness was in addition tuned by passing exchange rate depreciations brought about by speculative monetary flows triggered by interest rate differentials (Bart 29).

These international imbalances played the role of rapidly extending the financial crisis that had its origin in the United States to several other nations. This was mainly due to the fact that current-account inequalities are replicated by capital account inequalities: the country with a current-account excess has to credit the disparity between its export returns and its import expenses to deficit countries.

Monetary losses in the arrears countries or the incapability to repay debts then directly feed back to the surplus countries and consequently put at risk their monetary system. This way of spreading the effect possesses an even greater power due to lack of control in monetary relations between countries in trade in the globalized economy.

Another significant cause of growing imbalances was movements of comparative prices in trade commodities as a result of speculation in monetary marketplaces. Ever-growing detachment of the dynamics of exchange rates with their basics, majorly the inflation differential between countries, led to extensive and pronounced movements in the general level of economies in relation to others (Paulson 39). These alterations in the actual exchange rates are without a doubt associated with increasing worldwide inequalities.

Speculation in money markets due to interest rate differentials have resulted in particular way of overspending that is now slowing down. Other economies like Iceland, East Europe, Australia, etc loaned foreign currencies that had considerably low rates of interest. With incoming funds after high outcomes, currencies of capital-importing economies grew in ostensible and actual terms with this leading to a decline of these economies’ competitiveness.

Losses of marketplace shares and increasing current account deficits led to unstable external positions for these economies. The onset of the international crisis set off the turn down of these hypothetical stances, led to a loss in value of the monies initially targeted by carry trade and forced firms and private households in the affected regions to default.

This poses a mainly foreign straight risk to the banks and other financial institutions in these economies (Paulson 41). A case to illustrate this is what came out between the East European debtors and their lenders from Austria. To add to all these, skyrocketing of goods prices ended up in the coming up of mostly very large current account surpluses in commodity exporting nations over the past five years.

However, when the rectification came, the position of several commodity producers in the smaller upcoming economies speedily took a nosedive. Other than a reduction in export earnings, this rectification devalues asset investment and infrastructure that was directly brought about by high demand and rapidly growing earnings of the last years.

The crisis grew amidst the overlook of international community – it failed to give the globalized marketplace viable international regulations. The abrupt downturn of speculative stances in the different sectors of the monetary market was set off by changes of the house costs in the United States.

The sudden change in prices was a consequence of the deregulation monetary markets on the international scale, mainly endorsed by nations around the world (Paulson 41). The spreading of risk and its severing and the knowledge on it was promoted by ensuring security through methodologies like residential mortgage-backed securities that looked to gratify the hunger of investors for bigger profits.

Minus the financial technique of deregulation in the presence of suitable laws, prospects on gins of purely monetary tools in the double-digit range would actually not have been possible. In fact, in actual economies with single-digit growth rates those prospects are mistaken from the beginning. Nonetheless, humanity has a tendency of assuming that in their lifetime events may take place that never took place before and thus temporarily ignore lessons they are supposed to have drawn from past events.

This happened in the not-long ago stock marketplace booms of the new millennium. In spite of the crash of 2000, a wide range of investors got to make investments in hedge funds and inventive monetary tools. These monies required that they ever increase their risk exposure for the sake of better gains with more complicated computer models looking for the best bets which in fact added to the ambiguity of many tools (Snape 20).

It ought to have been clear from the onset that all could not be standard and that the ability of the actual marketplace to cope with inflated real estate and commodity costs or skewed exchange rates is sternly restricted, however it is only now, by the occurrence of the crisis, that this is getting to be understood by many players and strategists.

An even further important pusher of this form of financial invention was the inexperienced notion that effective marketplace theorems that did not identify intent uncertainty but erroneously assumed well informed buyers and sellers and thus promised reduced risk.

Due to the invisibility to many of these complicated bundled commodities and services, a large number of investments got their way into tools classified as low risk. A globalized clientele made investments in these bonds for the reason that the international inequalities had intensified the international monetary relations and had created the need for monetary institutions located in the economies with current account surpluses to hold much of the toxic paper (Buiter 28).

Initial money diversification was viewed by many as diversification of risks. Nevertheless, the opposite took place – financial invention ended up in a concentration of risk since most of the tools were secured by using investments that held similar default risks.

The credit-rating bodies completely failed. It was mainly due to the microeconomic advance they normally take and their ignorance regarding macroeconomic and general issues on an international scale that they failed to understand the risk of so many players on the same frail link between the small actual marketplace and a bloated monetary sector.

Relatively low interest rates globally during the crisis has driven investors to hunt for higher yields and relative stability in monetary marketplaces reflecting the low cost of funds and solid economic growth leading to considerable under pricing of risk. This has weakened lending standards and increased leverage.

The increase in leverage sharpened the exposure to liquidity risk for monetary institutions as they relied progressively more on wholesale marketplaces for financing and these funds became increasingly short term (Bernanke 6). New and complicated monetary products led to speculation on related risks and made a contribution to mispricing on unimaginable levels. This led to failure on the risk controls with various fraud cases bringing about considerable losses.

Significant changes have taken place since the year 2007 leading to imbalances in the savings and investment sectors in major economies. In the United States for instance, state-run savings declined as the financial position shifted from a surplus to a considerable deficit and as household savings fell, leading to a dramatic increase in the current account deficit.

The decrease in household savings partly reflected considerably low interest rates and increased accessibility of funding interrelated to shelter that brought about a boom in consumption and housing investment.

Growth enhanced by consumption in the United States fostered economic recovery in Japan and Europe on the back of higher exports. Specifically in Europe, corporate profits went up. However, problems in the framework of these economies and especially rigidities in commodity and labor markets restricted investment opportunities (Paulson 44). The combination of high business savings and slow-moving investment led to increasing nationalized savings and outside surpluses.

Imbalances in savings and investments and current account surpluses of growing economies also grew sharply. In emerging economies in Eastern Asia, savings went up.

The increases in the external surpluses of these economies reflected a decrease in relation to GNP in investment and particularly the extremes in such investments that took place in the upsurge to the meltdown (Paulson 44). Surpluses form outside reflected strategy decisions in many of these economies to reconstruct official coffers which had been decimated during the financial crisis.

The years after 2008 showed a dramatic increase in the savings and investment inequalities in China. In spite of a strong investment performance, China’s savings went up in a dramatic manner. Government savings improved and business savings recorded a steep rise. Generally in Eastern Asia, outside surpluses put upward pressure on exchange rates (Bernanke, 18). However, this demand was mitigated by extensive untainted money intercession and thus delaying regulation.

After mid-2008, current account surpluses of oil-exporting economies of Middle East began to rise as pronounced worldwide demand concern about the reliability and security of oil supply pushed prices higher.

The substantive profits by oil producers were in large net monetary outflows which found their way to the United States. With the anticipated level of savings in the world getting over and above the desired investment at the interest rates existing at the time, the excess of world savings pushed down actual rates of interest and started a boom in commodity prices (Bernanke 18).

The series began to provide for itself at this juncture. With an increased accessibility to credit and lower interest rates, United States households utilized borrowed funds to maintain their consumption and stimulate a home development boom. Ever-growing United States demand fuelled additional growth in the rest of the world, being an addition to current account surpluses. This was especially in Eastern Asia upcoming economies.

Among these economies, China’s current account surplus shot through the roof and official reserves went up by record levels. Cutthroat pressures originating from China also put pressure on other East Asian economies to restrict the growth of their currencies against the U.S. dollar, promoting outside surpluses and preserve amassing in these economies (Snape 24).

The current account surpluses of oil-producing and exporting economies in the Middle East also went up due to rising global demand continued to drive up oil prices. Consequently, by way of net cash flows, upcoming economies’ outside surpluses were channeled back to the United States. This funding then assisted finance a continuation of the consumption and real estate boom and a steady rise in commodity costs.

To a considerable extent, the strong liking for United States dollar commodities that came out reflected the crucial role that the dollar plays as a set aside currency in the global monetary system.

As a result, the United States was in a position to fund its increasing outside deficits rather without difficulty and holdup required adjustments in domestic savings and in its equilibrium of expenditure, reflecting the first attribute of the global monetary system. However, there was also a net movement of private capital into the United States (Whelan 11).

This reflected the idea that United States markets were better synchronized, had better control, and were more protected than marketplaces in upcoming countries. What is more, in the early 2009 economic growth was faster in the United States and gains on monetary investments were seen to be higher than in other developed economies. As a result, a self-strengthening effect set in. As cash inflows to the United States promoted investment prices and gains, additional flows of capital were stimulated.

Few analysts question the being in place of the inequalities or their contribution to investment cost inflation. However, with the benefit of hindsight, many commentators have argued that the United States should have used monetary strategy(s) to dull the effects of cash inflows, thereby forestalling the crisis.

It is said that the Federal Reserve allowed free monetary conditions to exist for too long, permitting the upsurge of too much liquidity in the monetary system. The Fed is a suitable scapegoat, but what these commentaries put forward is that it could have used financial strategy alone to deal with international inequalities. They fall short of realizing that financial strategy is a blunt gadget (Bank for International Settlements 22).

During the crisis period, an observation has come out that the problem of global trade imbalances would reduce over time as expansion in the rest of the world, particularly in Europe and Eastern Asia, was seen to disengage from expansion in the United States.

In concurrence, it was also argued that other economies, especially China, were stepping up to become engines to maintain international growth. It was therefore argued that world inequalities could be self-rectifying and that there was time for more steady alterations in economic strategies in the major economies (Bank of International Settlements 22).

The slump in the United States has had a harsher than expected impact on the rest of the globe has brought to the fore these propositions as myths, and dashed hopes that a lasting rectification in global imbalances could be attained without a severe disruption in world growth.

Now there is an apparent requirement for strategy measures to deal with the problem, and global inequalities should no longer be thought as a medium-term issue that can be dealt with progressively. The disengagement and new engines of growth mythologies grew up from an unsophisticated examination of state-run financial records.

The data for Europe and Eastern Asia economies indicated that home demand and not net exports was progressively more the main supplier to economic growth, consequently the observation that development in these economies had disengaged from growth elsewhere (Bart 31).

The new growth engines allegory was derived from an analysis of world GDP information, which clearly showed that other economies’ contributions to world GDP growth were increasing in relation to the contribution of the United States. Undeniably, China’s contribution to world growth exceeded that of the United States in 2007.

The fundamental problem with the investigation underlying the disengagement myth was that it paid attention exclusively on the adjoining sources of growth (Bart 31). No effort was made to try to determine whether home requirements growth was self-sustaining or whether it was generated as the multiplier result arising from the returns resulting from exports.

Likewise, in the new engines of growth myth, the implication that China was turning into a growth engine for the global economy did not factor in whether China was in reality generating demand for the rest of the world. China was indeed, to some level, doing so for the rest of Asia.

On the other hand, the engine at the end of the day driving China’s import demand was China’s exports (Snape 25). That the two propositions were in the end just myths became really clear as the United States fell into recession. The financial slump may have been additional to the hold up in the rest of the economies, but it is the loss of spur derived from United States demand that has been the main issue in pulling down economic growth, particularly in Eastern Asia.

In one general view, present-day economic problems make it hard in the near term to deal with global inequalities, due to concerns about downbeat short-run effects on growth and employment. But ignoring inequalities and getting back to previous strategies to stimulate growth will serve only to worsen the imbalances when the global economy gets back on its feet, making them an even greater problem and creating an economic environment that eventually may be unstable (Bank for International Settlements 23).

The challenge for heads of state is to come up with strategies and policies that both pad the economic slump in the short-term and deal with global imbalances at a rational tempo.

Conclusion If humanity seeks to keep similar crises at bay in the future, it will have to reckon with global trade imbalances and the factors in the global financial organization that stimulated their growth. If nothing is done, the imbalances will simply build up again as the global marketplace recovers, and in time they will end up being a major causal factor to the next global crisis. In the end it must be acknowledged that solutions lie not with any worldwide gathering but with governments.

The international system has made it possible for governments to build up huge balance of payments inequalities; the international system will continue to allow them to do so. But the past year or so of crisis brings out the difference between doing what may be politically practical and doing what is financially viable. If country establishments do not learn their lessons from the present-day economic and financial crisis, they will without a doubt find themselves reliving it.

Works Cited Bank for International Settlements, ‘‘Triennial Central Bank Survey: Foreign Exchange and Derivatives Market Activity, 2007.’’

Bernanke, Ben. ‘‘Monetary Policy and the Housing Bubble.’’ Speech at the Annual Meeting of the American Economic Association, Atlanta, GA, 3 January 2010.

Bernanke, Ben. “The Global Saving Glut and the U.S. Current Account Deficit,” Sandridge Lecture, Virginia Association of Economics, Richmond, VA, 10 March 2005.

Buiter, Henry. “Getting the Global Recovery Right: Fiscal Balances, Fiscal Incentives and Key Relative Prices,” Citi Economics Global Economic Outlook and Strategy, Chief Economist Essay, pp. 6-23, 24 Feb 2010.

Paulson, Junior. “Remarks on Financial Rescue Package and Economic Update.’’ US Department of the Treasury, Washington, DC, 12 November 2008.

Snape, Richard. “China’s Policy Responses to the Global Crisis.” 2009- July 2, 2010,

Van Ark, Bart, “Europe’s Productivity Gap: Catchers Up or Getting Stuck?” unpublished paper, University of Groningen, 2006.

Whelan, Karl. “Global Imbalances and the financial crisis”. 2010 – July 2, 2010,


Family, Stress and Delinquency among Adolescent Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

As research studies and social theories show, there is a great correlation between family life, the environment and the causes of various types and degrees of antisocial and deviant behavior, especially among adolescents. In this paper, I will discuss the effect of family life, particularly the effects of stress within the family on formation of these forms of behaviors, which have become increasingly relevant to the study of antisocial behavior.

The purpose of this report is to bring into light one of the most argued social issues; that is, the effects of family life and stress on delinquency among adolescent in today’s societies. Firstly, the study will focus on what causes delinquency in children and adolescents in relation to families and parenting, beginning with an external factor that may influence children.

The method of research I will primarily use will be observational investigations of adolescents with one parent and adolescents with two parents.

I will also use many of my own experiences and knowledge to compose several ideas as relates to this critical topic. On the other hand, through seeking support from research findings and external scholarly sources, I will discuss the general effects of parental upbringing practices on growth patterns of children, regardless of whether these children will involve themselves in deviant behaviors of not.

Adolescence one of the important phases of human development, because as research studies show, majority of the experiences that children undergo during adolescence greatly influence their later life, as children’s levels of interaction with parents and peers increase during stage.

Although adolescents value very much their peers, the family is their central unit of support financially, emotionally, and socially hence, the effects of familial practices on adolescents’ behaviors (Berber, 1992, pp. 69-70). Parental supportive behaviors play a crucial role in determining how children will socialize themselves into the world, as most children will tend to copy their parents behaviors.

In addition to coping, depending on the level of support and attention children receive from their parents, in terms of meeting their needs, most children who lack the required support tend to seek other ways of satisfying their needs. Hence, unless such children receive the required parental or guardian guidance, likelihoods of such children engaging themselves in antisocial behaviors are high.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Different parents express their control over children in various ways, for example, some parents believe in dialogue as a mechanism of solving their children’s problems. Such a case is contrary in parents who believe in use of coercion as a control methodology. In addition, some parents may employ inductive mechanisms when it comes to controlling their children (Steinberg


Human Resource: Importance of Individuals Research Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Importance of individuals


Works Cited

Introduction Human thinking, physical input and strategy have always been at the middle of human survival and development. Without such input, it’s difficult to fathom how development would have come by. However, since human beings have always been there, it has always been easy to dismiss their input as something which is easily replaceable through other people.

With skills development and competition gaining center stage however, many companies now realize that human capital is far more superior that the monetary and the machinery investment that people make in businesses. This is because without an efficient human capital, then the machinery and monetary capital invested in a business cannot bear much fruit.

Importance of individuals For business entities or organizations to exist, Stockley (2) notes that there has to be people to run them. Such include the organization/business owners, leaders, shareholders, employees, members and directors among others. Individuals come up with strategies of how business has to be run and hence the success or failure of the same largely depends on them.

In the contemporary world, plain human capital is no longer enough to ensure that a business or an organization performs to its best. Faced with increasing competition and changes in the working environment, organizations have had to ensure they hire the best talent, train and equip them with the necessary skills and also motivate them well in order to ensure that the employees are retained in the company.

In addition to the contribution that individuals make to an organization or a business establishment, Family Business Battleground (7) notes that “the collective attitudes, skills and abilities of people” make a significant contribution to productivity in the work place. This means that even where groups are credited for good performances, the individuals who constitute the groups are responsible for the group outcomes.

Even in the environment where technology is being adopted to improve performance and competitiveness in specific business fields, it is apparent that technological knowledge can easily be aped from one market player to the other. With human knowledge and skills which are better than the competitor’s, an organization is able to retain the competitive edge for longer.

On a more self-assessing note, one realizes that technological development which is being touted as the solution to most of the challenges experienced in businesses today would not be possible were it not for the individual innovators and researchers who turned ideas conceptualized in their minds into tangible technological equipment, which are being used today.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Even in a world where artificial intelligence is predicted as a possible substitute to human intelligence in the future, Ahmed (10) notes that it can only be used to augment the knowledge possessed by people rather than replace it.

This is because beside the skills and knowledge required to work in a specific environment, individuals also rely on their intuition and common sense in decision making, something that the artificial intelligence enable devices such as robots do not possess. Human input in technology has however led to the creation of artificial intelligence, which in turn has led to more efficiency and speed in the modern work place.

Conclusion Most of the advances made in human development are courtesy of individual human input. As such, the individual remains a fundamental figure and the most important capital resource in the society to date.

Works Cited Ahmed, Asif. “Replacing Humans with Machines: The Insurance Industry has begun to Leverage Artificial Intelligence to Cut Costs and Improve Efficiency. But Technology Will Never Completely Supplant Human Reasoning”. The Free Library by Farlex. March 2002. Web.

Family Business Battleground. The importance of human Capital in Business. Dec. 2009. Web.

Stockley, Derek. Human Capital Concept- Definition and Explanation. Feb. 2005. Web.


The U.S. Federal Parole System Essay writing essay help

Criminal offenders have existed in the society for as long as the history of mankind is concerned. Different measures have been put in place to ensure that criminals are brought to book and prosecuted accordingly. In the United States, numerous criminal justice systems have made attempts to ensure that there is social order at all times. However, some of these systems have received criticisms from a cross-section of the society as far as their effectiveness is concerned (Schmalleger, 2005).

The parole system is one of the criminal justice approaches with the longest history in some countries, particularly the United States. It refers to supervised conditional release of an inmate from prison which is granted way before the elapse of a given prisoner’s court sentence (Hoffman, 2004). This system, however, varies in application from one state to another in America. For instance, in some states, any person convicted of serious crime like murder or rape is not considered for parole.

Since parole is granted under strict terms and conditions, the slightest violations result in its revocation and subsequent re-incarceration. The essay discusses the general history and purpose of the parole system in the United States. The negative as well as positive effects of this system on the society are also discussed. Moreover, the various functions of local, state and federal parole agencies are highlighted.

The federal parole system is emphasized in this essay. Although law enforcement agencies work hard to keep criminals off the streets, while the prisons house them, it is the responsibility of the parole agencies to ensure that the offenders stay out of trouble and get the help they need by providing community resources to help them socially reintegrate into the society after being released.

Persons convicted of any given crime receive appropriate sentence from the criminal justice system applicable in that jurisdiction. Imprisonment for a specified period of time has been one of the ways of rehabilitating convicts (Parent, 1994).

The length of time may range from a few months to life imprisonment. However, as defined above, parole creates an opportunity for the inmates to be released on specified terms and conditions before they complete their sentence in jail. Usually, the parolee is under regular supervision and is still under the initial sentence.

The activities of the parolee are restricted by an appointed officer, particularly when it comes to place of residence, associates, and day to day occupation with an aim of curbing a relapse into criminal activities. The procedure of granting parole is regulated by the statute established in the authorities of the United States (Dolgoff


Angelina Jolie Biography Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Abstract




Abstract Angelina Jolie is an American actress. After her parents separated, she spent most of her early childhood with her mother. The actress says that she came to admire her present career at the time she was with her mother since they both used to watch movies a lot at home.

The actress has also been involved in humanitarian actions like visiting and sponsoring refugees camps. Due to the environment she was brought up from, she psychologically turns out and realizes her potentials. Psychologically, she develops morally and emotionally. Her emotional development however lands her into a life of separations just like her parents. Phenomenological and psychodynamic personality approaches are the most appropriate theories that describe the behaviors, achievements and traits of the actress.

Introduction Angelina Jolie is at the moment a world figure featuring in several movies and films courtesy of Hollywood film and movie producers. She is an American citizen pursuing careers of acting movies and comedies apart from other engagements. The actress was born in the U.S in a place called Los Angeles which is actually a local area in the state of California. This was in the year 1975 and the actress grew in this location till her early youth when her parents locked horns and separated by act of divorce in the American court of law.

She decided not to follow her father but rather moved and continued to stay with the mother spending most of her leisure time watching movies. Sometimes the mother would accompany her to cinemas and theatre to have fun and enjoyment by watching public movies and live acting by America’s most famous actors at that moment. It is speculated that it is this kind of life that ignited her urge for the career of being a star by acting movies (Barnes, 2008).

According to her, despite her biological male parent being a famous actor, she never used the opportunity to follow the father’s footsteps but instead, she used the chance for publicity which started long ago while she was still young. She used to engage in media interviews and interrogations and this is what made her even more famous at a younger age.

The actress while still in school tried to engage in the modeling career. She wished to become one of the world models but unfortunately, this career did not end up in her favor although she was not intimidated by this and instead took it positively applying several tricks to console her self. Up to the moment, the actress has had three official husbands divorcing one and marring the other. She’s also had several scandals some of with are socially oriented involving strange character of sex and weird relations.

She has three biological children of her own two of which she had with the present husband who she admitted publicly that she snatched from her core actress when the two were involved in a movie setting being married officially. In her career as an actress, the lady has been so successful winning many precious and recognizable awards like that one of the golden globe awards. Such breakthroughs has made her so famous not only in America but in the world as a whole (Bandon, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The actress has also had several problems with her father. She even changed her surname from Voight a name of her father to Jolie through a court of law. Both her and the father have been agreeing in some occasions and disagreeing in other periods till currently when her present husband Plitt made them reconcile again.

The actress is currently thirty five years of age and she is now settled with her husband Plitt whom she has adopted with three children and biologically had with him two others. Previously she had biologically had only one child and this comes to a total of six children.

The actress is currently engaged in humanitarian activities using his career as an actor to portray her humanitarian concern by paying visits to many refugee camps in several counties including Russia and Afghanistan. The work of charity has made her develop interest in humanitarian courses and she admits to be pursuing them as a part time up keep (Barnes, 2008).

Talking of heredity, the actress has psychologically been influenced by heredity on emotional grounds in a way that she has kept a series of separations and divorce just like her parents did. May be she is into her parents traits of separation and believes that the solution to small differences in the family is separation and that is why she has little to defend herself when asked by the media of what makes her break several marriages.

Her emotions can no longer withstand any disagreements with her male partners and this is attributed to the kind of life her mother lived when she separated from the actress’s father and decided to move to New York with her daughter and start a new life. Since the daughter grew up in her single mother’s hands, she might have inherited the traits of her mother and that is why she is psychologically emotional with men (Allport, 1990).

The environment in which the actress was brought in is described as humble. Her mother only used to earn a little and that is why the lady used to sometime put on second hand attires. She grew up knowing that there also exists a group of needy people in the world and that is why she has psychologically tilted her mind to a humanitarian individual since she knows what it means by need for help.

She says that her fellow students used to mock and intimidate her based on how she dressed but this did not affect her but rather has modeled her up psychologically to engage in works of charity to help those in needy just like her before. Therefore I can say that the environment in which the actress grew has contributed a lot her moral and behavioral psychological developments (Rochlin, 2008).

We will write a custom Essay on Angelina Jolie Biography specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As described above in the introduction, the family issues that have so much influenced the actress’s developmental growth and adjustment is the relationship problems that her mother and father had.

Since the two separated when the actress was still a youth and the mother decided to migrate to New York and stay with her, she learnt a lot from her mother about relationships and it is her mother that made her develop the attitude of being an actress. The mother fully sponsored her through the theatre school and her act of watching movies while at home made her daughter develop an urge to become an actress.

The kind of life she used to live with her mother also made her overcome several challenges she faced including failure in the modeling career, intimidation from colleagues about her mode of clothing and her yearning to become a funeral director before. All this situations made her finally settle on the right career which it acting and doing engaging in humanitarian work and programs (Rochlin, 2008).

The phenomenological personality theory applies to the actress since the theory emphasizes on individuals with self driving perceptions and with an esteem that is likely to lead to self actualization. The theory holds that the primary motivation that one develops naturally while still in his or her early childhood is the one that leads to exploration and fulfillment of the potential. Such motivation include generally being good to others, love and general creativity.

This theory applies to the actress since being a person of her career needs a lot of creativeness and desire to achieve. We also saw that she tried many careers without giving up till she finally realized her potential as an actress. The theory still justifies her behavior of being concerned, caring, loving and general goodness through her humanitarian actions which she developed from her childhood experience (Mischel, 1998).

The second theory that applies to the actress is the psychodynamic personality theory. The theory explains personality traits and character as influenced by ego, the super ego and also the id. The id is simply the basic instincts that one wishes to gratify. The ego is the intermediate between what the society expects and individual expectation while the super ego is the internalization of hereditary and social values.

The actress internalized the traits and social values of the parents which are making her live a life full of separations and emotional disturbances. However, the actress balanced her instincts and the society expectations in a way that as much as she strived to achieve her goals as an actress, she also fulfills the society expectations by engaging in humanitarian duties for the general benefit of the society (Eysenck, 1996).

Conclusion In my own opinion, although both theories apply to the actress, the phenomenological approach best explains the behaviors of Jolie Angelina together with her traits. This is because from her young early setting, the girl proved determined, motivated and creative never to give up till she realized that her potential was full invested in acting. Her general goodness since she was young both to her brother and mother has made her extend the same to the society especially the needy groups like the refugees.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Angelina Jolie Biography by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Allport, W. (1990). Personality and Social Encounter: Selected Essays. Boston: Beacon Press.

Bandon, A. (2009). Following, Ambivalently, in Mom or Dad’s Footsteps. The New York Times journal, 7 (5), 101-113.

Barnes, B. (2008) Angelina Jolie’s Carefully Orchestrated Image. The New York Times journal, 13 (4), 131-139.

Eysenck, H. (1996). The Structure of Human Personality. London: Methuen publishers.

Mischel, W. (1998). Introduction to Personality. New York: American press.

Rochlin, M. (2008). Angelina Jolie: For a Fighting Machine, a ‘Bad Girl’ Image Is Good. The New York Times journal, 2 (3), 59-64.


Need someone to take hesi exam for me it is a exam that is recorded so it would need to best essay help

Need someone to take hesi exam for me it is a exam that is recorded so it would need to be a female. Please look up exam it is a 5 hour exam. You would need to log into my my account and follow the steps I will explain more if I assign you


The role of the graphic designer in today’s society Essay college essay help online

In today’s society, graphic designers carry out a myriad of artistic and professional services, which center on visual communication and presentation. Graphic designers normally employ different techniques to develop symbols, images, and/or words that create a visual representation of ideas and messages in areas such as market research, corporate identity/branding, poster design, advertisements, book layouts, motion video graphics, clothing/fabric design, product design, and many other areas.

In solving visual communication problems, they often make use of topography, visual arts, and page layouts procedures to generate products that transcend frontiers and cultural divides. Among all the arts around us, graphic design is the most universal, powerful, and influential (Newark, 6). Since we engage with it in the streets, in almost everything, and even on our bodies, it is not just a modern or a capitalistic phenomenon. This paper examines its role in today’s society.

Graphic design is a very new design expression technique, which was a spontaneous response to the vast communication requirements of the industrial revolution. As a product of the last hundred years, graphic design was developed in order to market the fruits of mass production to the increasing numbers of consumers.

In the late nineteenth century, the growing reproduction technologies in Europe and North America presented the graphic designers with the opportunity of taking part in the transformation process. From then, having been revolutionized by the advent of computers, the field has been instrumental in serving various purposes to the society.

To begin with, graphic designers have a role to brand the world. Since in most parts of the world branding has replaced corporate identity, many organizations have been compelled to place a higher value on a well-designed, well-managed graphic identity (Holland, 1). Therefore, designers play a requisite role in the different marketplaces of the world.

Branding is a very essential element for any business since it focuses on meeting the needs and the desires of the consumers. The point of view of the consumers dictates the language, the voice, and eventually the design of the product. Therefore, in order to meet the ever-changing shift in consumer tastes and requirements, graphic designers endeavor to develop brands that are unique from others, current with the times, and are consistent in delivery.

The greatest thing about graphic design is that it is far-reaching. That is why most companies are using it to build a strong identity in order to stay competitive in the market. Companies usually use graphic design to boost awareness of their company and to push their products to their fullest potential in reaching the customers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The companies that have succeeded have done so because they have used quality graphic design as one of their supporting themes. On the other hand, companies that have not taken an advantage of this have never succeeded in creating an additional traffic. A graphical logo is able to influence a consumer to either purchase or not purchase a product. Therefore, most organizations usually employ the services of a graphic designer to develop simple yet catchy graphical images with the aim of attracting any prospective consumers.

The influence of graphic design is evident in the area of commercial advertising. It is employed extensively in conveying the ideas and purposes of the products as well as giving a sense of interest and wonder.

As the designers communicate meaning by means of visual language, appealing products are generated to reach the target audience. This is not possible to be achieved in real life. For example, if someone is shooting a film and he intends to make something fly, he will use graphic design to achieve this purpose. He will computerize the image and graphically generate the image of an object flying.

Graphic design makes them to look realistic. If it were not present, most things would be tasteless and uninteresting. From the very clothes we wear, to the technique of manufacturing various things, graphic design acts on our emotions and assists in shaping our feelings concerning the world around us.

In this modern and fast world, an anti-reading trend is present that is difficult to control. Therefore, graphic designers promote literacy by means of their designs, which manipulate the elements and principals of various subjects to convey an idea in its visual form.

Messages are usually being carried either through text or image and are received either through seeing or reading. The process of seeing is discerning, moving and sometimes realized against the will of a person. On the other hand, the process of reading is a bit more complicated.

This is because the text’s written language signs must be decoded by knowing the proper sequence of the various sings. Without proper analysis of the language of the message, a person cannot successfully decode the information. This difference between reading and seeing has made graphic design to be an important field in our everyday’s life. Graphic images generate a coherent and interesting piece of work, which surpasses language barriers.

We will write a custom Essay on The role of the graphic designer in today’s society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Graphic designers also have a social role in today’s society. This unique responsibility is derived from their anticipation to take part in the creation of a new world since inequality and various evils are on the increase. It is possible for art to form a component of every life on the planet. From the time of its creation, graphic design is continuously structuring itself in a self-directed and diversified way. This has been taking place in direct relation with the specific social fabrics of various societies in the globe.

Therefore, it is important to note that this diversity is what will lead to the likelihood of the growth of graphic communication across the globe in the coming years. In a graphic communication process, there is a link between two propositions: the transmitting subjects and the recipients. They both have their various needs and expectations. These give the social dimension of graphic design in today’s society.

Graphic design employs words and images for communicating by means of visual language. If it were not present in our world currently, so many things would be in a mess. Its absence would make things like newspapers, internet, and literature items, to disappear from the face of the planet since all things would have to be painstakingly written by hand.

In the absence of graphic design, we would be forced to receive every information through the spoken word and this would make us to enter another period of Dark Ages. In such an instance, ignorance, prejudice, and superstition would be widespread. However, as long as graphic design is here to stay, its benefits will continue to be felt in today’s society.

Works Cited Holland, Deborah K. Design issues: how graphic design informs society. New York: Allworth Press, 2001. Print.

Newark, Quentin. What is graphic design? Hove, England: RotoVision, 2002. Print.


Need for Strategic Thinking in Business Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Critical Analysis of the Classical School of Strategic Thinking

The Classical Scientific School

The Classical Administrative School

Critical Analysis of Other Schools of Strategic Thinking


Reference List

Introduction Both classical and many other schools of strategic thinking have been used to describe the concept of business management strategy. Strategic thinking has become a major concern of many business organizations because of the need to achieve mutual benefits between the organization and the employees through proper management strategies.

Proper strategies are necessary for the business to improve its productivity. Business productivity can never be improved without the member taking part in the strategy formulation (Lampel


Will Robots Take Over Human Jobs? Research Paper college admission essay help

Introduction At first, robot technology was an invention whose aim was to fascinate the human being. Its ability to imitate certain characteristics of a human being, and its ability to do certain specific tasks that it was programmed to do is a point of fascination and impression. Inventors would display their technological skill through making such inventions that would outdo human beings in performing certain tasks.

For instance, the French brothers, Pierre and Henri have been credited for inventing a doll that is capable of playing the Piano. Such early inventions proved to be of no economic or social value to the community, yet the idea of letting robots assist in some of the human activities was still to be unveiled.

Since this time in the eighteenth century to date, robotics has revolutionized to a point that it threatens to face off some of the common duties that a human being performs.

One look at the modern industries will give an idea as to what extent robots have been engaged in performing human duties. Though most of what they do involve only small functions that they could possibly perform, man has done a lot to ease the amount of work that he needs to do. This paper seeks to persuade business persons and government institutions to implement the use of robots in their working fields.

The idea here is to give the importance of using robots and the amounts of benefits prospected from their use. On the other hand, the paper is purposely written to convince people to get used to the fact that robots are a part of humanity and that they should involve them in their day-to-day activities.

Level of Acceptance of Robots by the Human Being Regardless of what other people think, robot technology has ultimately taken over a greater part of our day-to-day activities. Even without noticing it, robots perform more duties in our daily lives than we can even realize. For example, robots make human beings save a lot of time in reaching their destinations since they are capable of preventing the build up of traffic jams. A robot can guide one in booking a holiday trip online.

In the same regard, computers offer a credible amount of aid in schools for many children (Doyle, 169). Many have tried to argue that the robot technology has reduced the amount of jobs available and therefore; many people have lost their jobs. Most of these people argue that due to the increasing number of computer equipped robots, the banking industry, the technical industry and even the administrative departments of many countries have suffered great losses at the expense of these inventions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More

The above chart is a breakdown of industrial robots worldwide.

Nevertheless, there are more jobs being created even when some are being lost. Technology simply brings with it a different twist of nature whereby one party looses as the other gains. The world cannot at any one point demand that robot inventions should stop. These creations have assisted men in doing more than meets the eye.

The use of robots has made it possible for man to make great strides in certain fields like astronomy, medicine and even geology. Further discoveries concerning the earth, the outer space and the unreachable places have been made due to the presence of these robots. Microbiological discoveries in medicine have been accomplished through certain assistance from robots, which have the ability to analyze objects through a microscopic eye.

Doyle also puts it that of late, trade unions have come to the realization that they cannot do without technology. They have been seriously affected for the past few decades, yet, they are quite realistic about the whole issue. The telephone industry for example, lost 33000 of its workforce to technology.

Yet it has realized that looking at the bigger picture the technology upgrade has benefited the population more than the workers would. The same applied for the television industry. Instead, the workforce implemented counter attacking methods in order to prevent the loss of shares in the market. Very soon, analysts predict that the world will be on the verge of a purely electronic age. The most that the workforce can do now is to prepare adequately for such moments in order to gain a maximum yield from such a change in time.

Industries/ Fields that should have Robot participation Without doubt, the technological advancement has given rise to a very new view of the industrial sector in the developing world. The need for each industry to work faster, produce more and be more accuracy has led to the initiation of robot technology in the same rate. The reason for this change is simple. Robots work without getting tired or losing concentration. The human being is affected by so many internal and external factors leading to inefficiency. Robots are the complete opposite of this.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Will Robots Take Over Human Jobs? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They are not affected by such factors as environmental conditions and exhaustion. In the 1990s, robots were mainly used in hazardous environments. These are places where possible health risks would occur for workers in that particular area. Nevertheless, the demand for more in the market has contributed majorly in shifting the focus of using these robots in these places to replacing manual production of goods in most industries.

Probably one of the biggest industries that would benefit greatly in the use of robots is the automobile industry in China. With the demand of such products like motor cycles and better automobile machines from the market, China’s industries would benefit greatly.

The industry should abandon the previous behavior of importation, assimilation and adoption of foreign ideas and concentrate on robotic technology. This though will have to rely on how fast the electrical and automobile industry will perform over the next few years. This is so if the country will want to reach its optimum potential in the near future.

In addition, spot welding can gain greatly from computer technology since a lot of calculation concerning tool trajectory can be done more accurately. Intelligent systems of paths to be followed when welding can also be done through these applications. The other beneficiary to robotics can be the machine tool industry. Robots have the advantage of applying programmed languages in planning systems and compiling sensory data in cell components.

Other advantages of using robots include their speed and accuracy, reduction in the time and effort used in general work and in the long run, saving up on time, energy and resource (Rembold, 41). On the other hand, automobiles are a good example of how technology can backfire in the present world. The exhaust gases from the automobiles pollute the atmosphere so much that the next technology must find a way to heal the environment.

Probably one of the greatest beneficiaries of robotics is the aerospace industry. The amount of accuracy and precision that is required in this industry will require the use of equipments that can manage sensitive tasks such as sealing, riveting, metal routing, and analysis of finished products.

Painting of interior parts of the aircrafts, drilling through fuselage panels, assembly of every circuit board required can all benefit from the precision that the robots possess. Off-line programming and general assembly will also require the use of robots. (Rembold, 43).

Advantages and disadvantages of using Robots From the discussions that have been given above, one can single out a few benefits and challenges that have been posed over time by the introduction or the continuous use of robots in the real world.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Will Robots Take Over Human Jobs? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In as much as it has brought about some form of revolution in the industrial sector in most countries, there will never lack challenges that will come with its use. Below is a general overview of the advantages that the technology carries with it, after which we are going to discuss some of the disadvantages of implementing the use of robots in our industries or our daily activities.


The main advantage that will stand out for all types of robots is their ability to give quality performance. The dramatic improvement on accuracy of the task that is performed has made the robots gain more demand in the industries that have turned to their use. The comparison between robot performance and manual performance is almost too large.

This is because robots possess the ability to achieve certain tasks faster and precisely with the ratio in the precision of humans to that of robots being very low. Human beings are prone to mistakes due to factors that are either internal or external. Another advantage that robots have is their production capacity. Human beings have the challenge of pausing to take breaks, sleep and vacations.

Robots make work easy.

Robots on the other hand constantly perform with little requirement for maintenance. Consequently, their production capability increases, coupled with accuracy to give an efficient output. Dangerous jobs are left for robots. This ultimately increases work safety as the workers are moved up the ladder to supervisory levels. Dangerous levels of performance can therefore be maintained with no human being at risk of any hazardous conditions.

Finally, there is a lot of saving on resources all round. For employers, working with one robot that performs the overall amount of work that more than five employees would otherwise do gives him a financial advantage. Not only does a robot save financially but they also save a lot of time used in production or servicing. Energy consumption is also reduced with the correct use of robots and this leads to great amount of savings for a company (RobotWorx, 1).


The amount of investment needed, especially in starting a company utilizing robots is great. Considering such factors as shifting workers’ roles, giving retrenchments, purchasing the robotic equipment and the regular maintenance cost may become a difficult activity to carry out.

One will have to count the possible cost of replacing manual work with robotic work and strike a balance. In essence, this will lead us to look at the rate of a robot’s Return on Investment (ROI). It is not obviously guaranteed that whenever one invests in a robot, his returns will shoot up. One will have to compare the numbers that are within the investment and the ones that are currently running without this kind of investment. Without taking much care, this same technology may as well lead to great losses for the company.

Moreover, the use of robots that are capable of making autonomous decisions is not advisable in areas to do with surveillance and giving care to the elderly persons. This is because these robots have the ability to make decisions without any human involvement. These robots have been used in the military.

However, many people feel that the autonomous robots may kill many people accidentally. In addition, studies indicate that Samsung is in the process of designing a robotic sentinel that can be used to man the border between South and North Korea. This gadget will be provided with a gun and cameras. This is naturally a risky gadget in any environment because the increase in the number of robots leads to escapism on the part of human beings.

Yet another disadvantage of using the robot is the level of expertise that is required by employees. We have just discovered that the robot gives the employee a leap up the ranks in the workplace. The problem in doing this is that management may have to retrain its workforce to be able to interact better with the new technology.

A lot of time is wasted in doing this and thus this can have a negative impact on the finances of a company. It is usually an expensive activity. Finally, as much as robots create safety for the worker through replacing them in certain dangerous environments, there are also other safety concerns that come with robots. One has to be careful of such activities as malfunction and imbalances that pose as hazards for workers who interact with these machines (RobotWorx)

More so, technology can change our sense of common purpose. For many years, human beings are used to do everything for themselves. The new standard for survival means making money to go to a mall or supermarket and get everything a family needs. With technology one does not have to physically go to a bank, withdraw cash and do the shopping.

With robotic technology, everything has been made easier. The technology does the work. Humans no longer do the work; they would rather oversee or totally avoid doing the work. If the machines fail to do the work, then the effect is felt on the production level.

Robot and shopping trolley

Economic and Social Impact of Robot Technology Clearly, there has been some form of impact brought about by this new technology over the ages. In this post industrialized world that we live in, the replacement of human workforce with robots has had a significant impact on the way life is viewed by most people in the industrialized world. For instance, the American automobile industry has sent packing a large number of its workforce due to the introduction of these machines. Consequently, labor unions have moved to curb the job losses until the senior workers have retired or currently working employees are retrained.

The growth rate in a country will also determine the impact that robots create. For example, since robots make work done far more efficient, goods that are produced are of high quality. The company head will have to balance off the selling price of the goods, taking into consideration the purchasing power of the worker who has been laid off. Most industrialized nations are having a hard time dealing with this fact, yet the robotic technology has to continue even as these challenges are being addressed.

The machines nevertheless are a remarkable agent of social transformation, which has furthered industrialization from where it was to what is currently being termed as super industrialization. The effect of having to understand the functionality of these machines even by normal civilians has caused extensive advancement in education levels as early as the childhood level.

With the increase in technology, comes an increase in knowledge. We cannot assume the impact that robots have eventually had on the food market, being the most important industry in any country. One farmer in an industrialized country has the ability of feeding at least one hundred people in the world. In addition, the world has moved at a faster rate, since the rate of production, service, transportation and marketing has increased.

Contrary To this, when manufacturing plants cut back on the number of workers, social security crisis is inevitable. The fact that not enough workers pay into the system due to the reduction on the number of employees, substantially has an adverse effect on the social security pool.

In the past, if there were five workers assembling doors on cars then there would be five salaries with each contributing towards the pool. When the robots took over, only one technician is needed to control the robot, hence a reduction in the amount that goes into the social security pool. However, the other four individuals will still need social security. As a result of this, the amount of money available for social security decreases. With this in mind, the question is, are the robots really better than manual labor? (Marinelli p.9 -10).

Conclusion Robots are part of us; they are a part of the growing technology that we all desired in the beginning. The fact remains that technology constantly advances year after year. More inventions arise, all with the aim of making man’s life a little more comfortable.

Without this technology, and with the constant increase in population and the heightened demands from the society, life would be unbearable. Even in our daily lives, some form of robotic technology possibly took part in making life more bearable. With all the negative implications that come with the technology, we cannot do away with them, especially with the amount of aid they give to man.

The most we can do is to accept their existence as part of this new generation and try to reduce any negative impact caused by their presence. Just as food is of unavoidable importance to the human body, consuming excess of it possesses a great health risk. In the same way, robots have a threshold in which they could possibly assist man. They can and should only be used to assist in the different activities and not replace man completely from his activities.

Robots act as managers.

Works Cited Doyle, Stephen. “Trade Union reaction to computers”. GCSE Computer Studies for you. July 22, 2010. Gloucester, United Kingdom: Nelson Thornes, 1990. 169.

Marinelli, Olivia. From human to robots: The consequences of labor replacement in the automobile industry.20 Oct 2008.

Rembold, Ulrich. “Types of Robots and their Integration into CIM Systems.” Robot technology and applications. July 23, 2010. Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press, 1990. 41-43.

RobotWorx. Advantages and Disadvantages of Automating with Industrial Robots. “Industrial Robots.” July 23, 2010. Web.


Sociological issues in schools Research Paper college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction Today’s society is too dynamic due to increased technological advancement. This has called for all societies of the world to give their young people the most relevant education and training to make the fit in the modern world. Despite all this efforts various sociological issues affecting education have continued to make it very hard for the children of the world to have a bright future.

Here we are going to look at various issues, the problems which they pose in the teaching fraternity and also the impacts which they can bring in the course of trying to improve such pathetic conditions. Some of these issues will involve the interest of teachers in teaching, different ways of teaching, student life in school and at home, social challenge in school, dealing with exceptionally gifted and talented learners, the multicultural issues and his try of education and finally the financing and governing American schools.

Interest of teachers in teaching

The interest of teachers in teaching is quite unquestionable. This is clearly evidenced by the fact that a lot of people are quitting their jobs to switch to teaching profession and also by the fact that a lot of teachers have strong passion for what they does best and that is teaching.

Despite all this obvious fact a lot of teachers are highly demoralized by low salaries associated with teaching profession and a lot of them opt to go for greener pastures in the event such opportunities arise on their way. Thus it can be said that a lot of people usually join the teaching profession in the events of economic hard times and the economic meltdown.

A lot of societies have tried in making efforts to harmonize the salaries of teachers with those of other people in public service and also in private sector but this has not materialized fully to the levels which are satisfactory to teachers thus it has been very hard to retain and attract teachers in training profession. These facts have created a lot of problems in the teaching fraternity and thus leading to poor education.

Different ways of learning

There are various ways of learning which vary deeply from one learner to another. This has called for the teachers to undertake extra tasks by analyzing and evaluating the individual learners in order to cater for their individual needs.

Firstly, one of the ways of learning is categorized as the convergers. Here the learners’ following in this category are highly associated with abstract conceiving and a lot of experimentation of ideals, use of inferences from general principles to base their logic to solve problems and also good application of ideas.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Secondly, we also have another category called divergers (Aurtus, 2010, p. 1). The learners who follow in this category are characterized with perceiving things by use of their senses, good imaginative aspects and thus they easily come up with constructive ideas and finally they are associated with viewing things in different perspectives.

Thirdly, the other category of ways of learning is assimilators. Those learners who follow in this category are associated with abstract conceiving of things, keenly reflecting on all their observations and they are also able to formulate theoretical models by means of inductive logic. Finally, the other way of learning can be categorized as accommodators.

Here the learners are associated with using concrete experience and also being involved actively in experimentation. These learners also involve themselves so much in doing things as opposed to reading and studying them (Spiller, 2007, p. 1). It is very clear that it is not an easy task for teachers to perform and at the same time perfect in class work due to the fact there is acute shortage of teachers in our society and thus this will lead to poor quality in education.

Life of student at school and at home

The students’ lives at school and at home are a bit different. This is because learners when they are in school they are guided by already set programs, rules and regulations unlike when they are at home where they the control on their time management. At home the student can be involved with doing what they love with minimal interference of their parents and guardians. This freedom which the learners are granted at home can lead to a lot of problems especially when it is misused by learners thus impacting negatively academically.

Social challenges at school

There are several social challenges which have continued to dominate in schools fraternity. The most challenging social issue is the one resulting from racism. Here the black students feel so insecure when they are among their white peers and this has explained why most parents have continued to bleach their children to have light skins so that they can feel comfortable at school. The other issue is that of religion whereby the learners are limited in ways of expressing their religious affiliations (“Science News”, 2010, p. 1).

Exceptionally gifted and talented learners

The exceptionally gifted and talented learners pose a great challenge to teachers. This is because if one fails to identify them and give them challenging tasks they will feel bored and they may end up dropping from school. There are also learners who are exceptionally gifted in other fields other than academics and thus teacher needs to identify them early otherwise their talents will go to waste. This requires greater funding to establish the facilities for extracurricular activities which may not be adequate (Heller, 2004, p. 13).

Multicultural issues and his try of education

The multiculticutural issues and the try of education are very important in formulating the educational policies. Here teachers are dealing with students from different cultures and need to be very sensitive in matters pertaining cultures. Also the mother countries of these students have different his try in matters of education thus the need to harmonize the histories of different countries of the world.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Sociological issues in schools specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Financing and governing American schools

The financing and governing of American schools is a very interesting subject because the federal government has very little say on the education. Some funding usually comes from the federal government but it is too insignificant. In most cases education in public sector is governed and given financial support by the individual states with the help from local government and also school districts.

The department of education usually has some authority but most power regarding schooling rests with the individual states (Fullinwider, 2007, p. 57). This has resulted in lack of equity among the states.

Conclusion It is very clear that for educational system to be effective all sociological issues are supposed to be properly addressed. This is because these issues have caused greater disparities in education in different states. If all these issues are not given proper attention then the quality of education offered to the young ones will not be adequate for the to fit in this modern world.

Reference List Aurtus, R. (2010). How to study- The Different Ways of Learning. Web.

Fullinwider, R. (1996). Public Education in a Multicultural Society. New York. Barnes


Understanding Economics: the nature and logic of Capitalism Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The word capitalism is derived from the word capitale which evolved from capital meaning “head’. Most economists are of the opinion that the word capital became common during the 12th century. The term was used to refer to a number of elements such as funds, interest on funds or a stock of various merchandises.

Capitalism is an economic system which is also considered to be a liberal market. Alternatively, capitalism can be defined as an economic system through which production is conducted privately. In capitalism, the market is free and hence it is not controlled by the government of that economy. Therefore, in a capitalist economy, the price, demand, supply and the distribution of goods and services are determined by the market forces[1].

In addition, in a capitalist economy, individuals have the right to own property. In a capitalist economy the wages and salaries are paid to the employees by the business which has employed them. Profits resulting from the business operations are wholly owned by the investors. This means that investments within a capitalist economy are not in any way under government control. Capitalism can also be defined as accumulation of capital with the objective of investing it in certain economic sector.

Miles suggested that capitalism started in Europe in the 16th century and it has gradually spread to other western countries during the 19th and 20th century. Currently capitalism is practiced in a number of countries around the world since it enhances economic growth and development[2]. This essay outlines a description of the nature and logic of Capitalism as given by Heilbroner. Additionally, the subsequent discussions support Heilbroner’s analysis of Capitalism as given in his Book.

The nature and logic of capitalism according to Heilbroner’s analysis There is no universally accepted definition of the word Capitalism. Many scholars have tried to give a clear-cut definition of capitalism. However, it has been noted that they end up contradicting ideas of others while others choose to avoid defining it all together. There are various economists who have contributed their views on capitalists’ economy.

Some of them include Karl Marx in his Marxist theory, Max Weber in his Weberian political sociology theory, the neoclassical economic theory and Keynes in the Keynesian economics among others. In all these theories, there are a number of elements of Capitalism that have been observed by these economists. Their ideas on Capitalism include the fact that the production of goods and services, payment of wages, control of profits and prices in the market are all controlled by private investors and not the government.

Therefore, the ultimate goal of capitalism is accumulation of capital which has been shown to be more than the money invested in most cases analyzed. This is in line with the Heilbroner’s analysis in which the author states that, in a capitalist economy the producers aim at making profits. These profits are determined by the prices of the commodities and the cost of production that the producer incurred during the whole process of production and creation of goods and services[3].

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Capitalism can be considered from various perspectives such as from the economists’ viewpoint, the political economists’ viewpoint or from the historian’s perspective. As shown above, the economist refers to capitalism as the market situation whereby the government has no control over the prices, costs, wages, profits and the rights to property ownership. On the other hand, the political economist’s idea of capitalism is that there is private ownership of property in the market.

In this case, the market players are classified according to their economic power and class. Additionally, the political economist views capitalism as a market situation characterized by wage labor. Therefore, in a capitalist economy, economic power includes the purchasing power, monopoly power, managerial power and bargaining power. Wage labor refers to the concept where the employee is involved in full-time labor or his/her services are sold to the employer in exchange for wages.

The end-product of the employee in this case becomes the property of the employer. The economic class referred to in this case includes the upper classes, the middle classes and the lower classes. Considering the two perspectives, one thing is obviously common between the two. It can be said that capitalism is a system that encourages amassment of income and wealth just like a magnet attracts iron filings[4].

In the perspective of the two viewpoints, Heilbroner suggested that the capital amassed is not the end-product which is produced in terms of a good or service but rather capital is the continuous expansion of the firm or the private property. In this case, capital is considered as the continuous process of expansion of the firm. In order to ensure a continuous expansion, the firm or private property owner should make profits and not loses. It is thus true that capital accumulation is the continuous process of expansion of a business.

Various economists such as Marx and Weber understood capital as the initial amount of money that an investor uses to start a business enterprise while the amount of money which helps the business to continue in its operation is referred to as the operating capital[5]. Therefore, capital is the amount of money that exceeds the cost of production. It is earned when the selling price of a commodity is higher than the cost of production incurred by the producer[6].

Capitalism as a mode of production has also been analyzed in Karl Marx’s Marxist theory. As depicted in our earlier discussions, capitalism is characterized by wage labor and therefore production process and profits are controlled and owned by individual employers or business owners.

Marx suggested that the commodity market which is a free market leads into a conflict between various classes of people and also contributes to labor exploitation[7]. According to Marx’s viewpoint, capitalism is an economic system where individuals through buying and selling of commodities make their living. In this case, a commodity refers to a good produced with the objective of being exchanged in a market environment.

We will write a custom Essay on Understanding Economics: the nature and logic of Capitalism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The commodities can either be consumer or capital goods8 . Capital goods refer to products used to produce other goods such as consumer goods. They include land, labor, machines and raw materials. On the other hand consumer goods entail finished goods which are ready for human consumption.

Examples of such commodities include cars, houses, books and roads. Therefore, commodities can be described as products of human labor, useful, cannot be separated from the producer and are produced to be exchanged in the market[8]. Money imposes or limits the market value of the commodity. On the other hand, the value of a commodity determines the demand of the commodity in the market.

But the initial major factor that influences the value and quality of a commodity is the labor. Since capitalism is associated with wage labor, it is the duty of the business owners to ensure that their employees are well paid and motivated in order to produce the highest quality of goods that can fit into the competitive market. The value of the commodity also determines the price of the commodity in the market.

The nature of capitalism is characteristic of a competitive market. In this case, prices revolve around the same point and do not change randomly. The producer operates at a loss if the selling price is below the cost of production. If this persists for a long time, the producer is forced out of the market[9].

On the other hand, when the cost of production is lower than the selling price, the producer earns a profit. High profit levels in a given economic sector have the probability of attracting more investors. Increase in profits, leads to overproduction culminating into a surplus in the market.

Surplus of commodities in the market forces the prices to fall due to the law of supply[10]. This is because when supply is high the demand goes down and hence the prices of the commodities also decline. In addition, market prices fluctuate according to the production costs which are mostly influenced by the cost of labor in the market[11]. Therefore, the market forces of demand and supply do not influence the value, but rather the value is determined by production.

This is in line with the Marxist theory which states that the value of a commodity is determined by the production itself and the level of production is influenced by the labor force which is considered as a capital good[12]. Labor force is a human resource which can either be mental or physical and is applied in production to convert raw materials into finished goods (consumer goods).

Therefore, salaries and wages of the employees should be put into consideration in a business because they affect the quality of production[13]. Marx suggests that the wages and salaries of the employees are determined by the surplus of production and the cost of labor power. Wages and salaries are determined by the number of hours that the employees work per day, the efforts applied or the intensity of labor and how the labor is productive[14].

Not sure if you can write a paper on Understanding Economics: the nature and logic of Capitalism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In a capitalist market, labor can be exploited because many competitors will be employing those people who do not require high amounts of wages. Therefore, the employer takes an advantage over the employees so as to increase the profits and at the same time he pays them low wages. In addition, Heilbroner suggests that when the competition in the market is stiff it would cause the profit to reduce to zero or negative[15].

This is true because when the competition for production is high the producers may decide to reduce the prices of their commodities so that they can be able to attract more consumers to consume their products[16]. When the prices are reduced to amounts lower than the cost of production, then the firm suffers huge loss and if the competition is stiff, the prices may become lower until the firm is not able to survive in the market and hence it closes.

The factors of production such as land, labor and capital produce wealth or income when labor force is applied[17]. This arises from the fact that labor force is a human resource which is either mental or physical and when applied to capital goods, consumer goods are produced. Therefore, the capital goods are not of any benefit to the firm or the investor until labor force is applied. This has also been suggested by other economists such as Marx, Weber and in the neoclassical economic theory[18].

Finally, in a capitalist market, the capital is influenced by the forces of demand and supply. Other than the market force, capital is also influenced by the way skills are applied in the production process and how the work is organized[19]. The management structure and the level of technology also influence the capital of a business.

This is true because even if demand and supply are high and the management structures are not stable, the firm’s operations are affected and hence may not be efficient. The same is also true when the technique used is not updated.

Conclusion This paper has given an in-depth evaluation of economics of capitalism according to Heilbroner’s analysis. In various ways, the research paper supports the idea of the nature and logic of capitalism as outlined by Heilbroner.

A capitalist economy refers to a type of economy where prices, production and distribution of commodities are controlled by the market players rather than the government. This makes capitalism to be a free or liberal market. To avoid labor exploitation in a competitive economy the trade unions and the government negotiates with the employers on matters related to wages and salaries and on the working conditions of employees.

According to the various theories postulated by various economists, capital is the initial amount of money or capital goods that investors use to start a business while profits include the amount that the investors use to expand their business. This opposes the suggestion of Heilbroner because he said that capital is the continuous process of expansion of the business. Heilbroner also states that the management, skills and technology affect the capital of a firm. In general, capitalism leads to economic growth and development.

Works Cited Bratton, John, Denham, Davis and Deutschmann, Linda. Capitalism and claddical sociology theory. Toronto. University of Toronto Press, 2009. Print.

Corfe, Robert. Social capitalism in the theory and practice: emergence if the new majority. New York: Arena books, 2008. Print.

Heilbroner, Robert. The nature and logic of capitalism. New York: W.W. Norton


Music Industry as a Cultural Industry Report essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Music industry as a cultural industry


Introduction The music industry normally deals with production and selling of pieces of music. It encompasses artistes, the firms and experts who produce and sell the recorded music. There are also concert promoters and agents, entertainment legal representatives, musical device producers, among others.

The term cultural industry refers to a range of establishments that generate, deal out and trade in merchandise that downrightly fall under imaginative arts. Examples of such merchandise include music, films and publications, among others. A cultural industry is normally a broad grouping of a given form of production.

For instance, a music store selling records and albums provides work for salespeople, administrators and customers. The trade of these products relies on other cultural industry dealings. Musicians have to carry out their recordings, distributors need to vend the music and recording studios have to do their part. Firms tasked with production of all needed equipment like tapes and compact discs, among others are also counted in this industry.

Music industry as a cultural industry Cultural creations are usually holders of distinctiveness, standards and significance and aspects of economic and societal improvement. The preservation and back up of cultural multiplicity directs to the promotion of the development of cultural industries that have the capability to cause an impact on a local and international scale.

Cultural entities, as mentioned earlier, create and deal out cultural commodities or services which at any instance are deemed as a definite quality, exemplify and put across cultural expressions, just like music and its other related compositions.

The music industry is already one of the most vibrant fields of the global economy and trade and is bound to grow even more with time, providing new business sides especially to the developing economies of the world.

Any form of music that is produced in any given setting normally mirrors that society’s way of life and practices, which is basically their culture and ways of life. This music also serves to form that society by way of the practices of homogeneity and commoditization, coming up with commodities rather than subjects.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The cultural industry’s aim is to meet the populace’s entertainment requirements just like the music industry. Normalized creations were initially obtained from the requirements of the end users and this is the reason as to why they usually encounter little or no resistance at all.

In the real sense, a sequence of operation and retroactive requirement is fusing the music industry ever more firmly. Through the normalizing of these requirements, the industry is influencing its products’ consumers to yearn for them even more. The end result is that mass production supplies a mass marketplace that diminishes the distinctiveness and likes of the particular end users who are as exchangeable as the commodities and services they require.

The underlying principle of the premise is to enhance the liberation of the targeted end user from the oppression of the producers through the induction of the consumer to query given ideas, much in the same way as normal culture or the cultural industry. This form of clarification is intended to bring out pluralism.

Anything that is made up by an individual is a manifestation of their efforts and an implication of their objectives. There is also a utilization value, which is normally obtained from the use. This is the case for both musical products and the general human cultures and ways of life. The trade worth for music usually is a reflection of its use and the state of the marketplace in question.

The cultural industry blends the ancient and the recognizable in today’s world to come up with fresh and innovative creations. The same is the case with the music industry. In almost all the sectors involved, commodities that are meant for the use by masses and which themselves are responsible for their acceptance are normally produced to a large extent in accordance to a plan.

The sectors by themselves have similarities in their framework and mostly bond into each other, resulting in an almost complete set up. This is as a result of modern-day technological abilities and cost-effective and organizational absorption.

The cultural industry deliberately assimilates its subjects from the top. It compels the specialties of high and low abilities that are set apart for thousands if not millions of years, the same way as the music industry. The importance of high art is devastated by assumption concerning its effectiveness, the importance of the lower passes away with the progressive limits inflicted on the defiant confrontation intrinsic within it as much as societal control is not present in entirety.

We will write a custom Report on Music Industry as a Cultural Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The masses are normally a thing of maneuver, an accessory of the whole process for both the cultural and music industries. The targeted end user is not actually the king; he or she is actually the object. This is despite the fact that the culture industry indisputably hypothesizes on the cognizant and incognizant state of the millions in the direction of which it is sent.

Music normally spreads through the mass media like radios and television sets. The term mass-media that was in particular set up for the cultural industry and serves to imply an undamaging ground or venture. The cultural industry uses wrongly its concern for the populace in a bid to replicate, buttress and build up their frame of mind, which it believes is certain and unalterable.

The way through which frame of mind might be transformed is left out all through. Just like in music, the targeted populace is not the gauge but the operation principles of the culture industry, nevertheless, both these industries can barely be in place minus being accustomed to the targeted masses.

The cultural goods and services of both the music and cultural industries are ruled by the standard of their recognition as worth, and not by their being in possession of explicit substance and harmonious set up. The whole application of the cultural industry with the gain motivation is the same for the music industry.

From the time when these industries first started to eke a living for their originators, there has never been looking back. In those times, gains were sought indirectly unlike later times and presently when the profit drive is not hidden in any way.

The independence of work of art like music was then corrupted by a combination of aspects and was normalized by the culture industry, the deliberate input of those in control notwithstanding. This was actually in a bid to land fresh opportunities for earning foreign exchange for various nations, but the major focus was in the first world nations at the time.

The opportunities that these people had gotten accustomed to turned out to be more and more unstable as a consequence of the same application procedure which by it meant the culture industry was to continue with its all-pervading principle.

Just like music, culture in the real sense did not just contain itself to people but it at all times concurrently made an objection in opposition to the frightened associations under which they operated, and thus lived by them. Cultural bodies characteristic of this industry are not commodities any more, they are goods and services entirely. This budge definitely calls for completely new experiences. In the end, the cultural industry does not need to straightly be after the gains from which it arose.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Music Industry as a Cultural Industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More All the mentioned curiosities have ended up being externalized in their ideologies and have made themselves free of the persuasion to sell the cultural commodities which must be consumed up in the end anyway, for both these industries. These industries turn into public relations in utter disregard for specific entities or saleable commodities. Brought to the fore in this is a broad serious compromise, adverts made up for humanity, such that in the end each commodity of the industries turns into its own classified commercial.

Nonetheless, all those qualities which initially stamped the alteration of literature into a product are upheld in this course. Both the music and cultural industries have their metaphysics, a set up of firmly conventional fundamental categories which can be brought together.

What stands up as progress in both these industries as the relentlessly new which it provides is usually the disguise for an everlasting similarity; universally the alterations conceal a frame which has varied just a bit as the profit push factor itself from the initial instances. This means that the term industry is not to be taken for its literal meaning. It best refers to the normalization of the thing itself and not entirely to the production process.

The aforementioned case prevails even in music, which is a core segment of the culture of any community or society, and the production course is similar to the technical forms of action in the broad division of labor and use of all machinery and other equipment involved.

Just like the cultural industry, the music industry is majorly in place for the service of third persons, upholding its attraction to the diminishing distribution progression of funds, to the business from which it came into existence.

Its main principle is about the use of the star method whose main operation principle is that the more inhuman its ways of maneuver and substance then the more meticulously and effectively the industry develops apparently great individuals and operates like a well-oiled machine. The cultural industry is industrial more in a sociological aspect in the integration of industrial forms of association even though nothing is physically produced.

The idea of technique in the cultural industry is similar with technique in music production. The idea behind all these is mainly the internal organization of the object or commodity itself. Both these industries locate ideological back up accurately in so far as they effectively protect themselves from the full impending of the techniques embodied in their outcomes.

They operate in a parasitic manner, from the practice of the substance production of commodities, with no regard for the requirement to the inner inventive whole entailed by its practicality.

Both the music industry and cultural industry share the idea of aura, the being there of that which actually is absent. The culture industry does not counter poise another standard to that of aura, but somewhat by the reality that it preserves the festering aura. The same is the case with the music industry and by these means they bring to the fore their own ideological misuses.

Conclusion It has in recent times become normal among cultural and musical top of the ladder persons as well as sociologists to caution against downplaying their specific industries at the same time emphasizing the great significance of these fields to humanity. As matter of fact, these industries are vital and whoever ignores them would be really naïve.

However, there is a misleading gleam concerning the caution to take them seriously. Due to the fact that these industries are majorly social, inquisitive queries about quality, about truths or falsehoods and about the aesthetics of the products from these fields, are usually suppressed. People raising these queries are pointed the finger at of seeking refuge in egotistical mystery.

It would be wiser to initially point to the twofold implication of significance that slowly finds it way in without being seen. As much as it touches the lives of many individuals the purpose of something is not an assurance of its particular quality.

The bringing together of aesthetics with enduring communicative elements should lead art work like music and general culture to the right place in disagreement with artistic snobbery. The significance of the music and cultural industries in the divine formation of the masses should be no exemption for suggestion on their legitimating, their crucial being and least of all by a discipline which perceives it to be practical.


Google Company Strategies on the China’s Market Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Google is a multinational company, and it servers millions of customers around the globe, including the Chinese. Recently, the company raised concerns following hacking attacks by the Chinese. Like any other company, Google also adopts different strategies on its attempt to remain competitive in the market. However, their efforts are surrounded by several setbacks; for instance, the Japanese market.

Porter’s five forces

Porter five forces can be applied in evaluating market rivals, opportunities and other market condition. The model can be summarized using the following terms i.e. rivalry, customers, suppliers, substitutes, entry/ exit obstacles.


The essence of Google extending its services to the Chinese was a strategy to reduce the potential market, for its competitors. Google faces stiff competition from Baidu, and thus wanted to acquire the company so as to monopolize the market. The brilliant move was, however, unsuccessful and thus resorted to sell all its Baidu shares.

Incase the strategy had been successful, and thus the company could have dominated china’s market share by over 80% share. The Chinese government poses several conditions that have to be met by both local and foreign companies. These conditions complicate the business environment for foreign companies, which in turn boost the local companies. This is, to a certain degree, influenced by the close relationship that Baidu has with its government.


As noted in the year 2002, the company expanded its market coverage to Korea China and Japan. This move by Google targeted market share domination i.e. by increasing the number of its customers (bearing in mind china’s population).

Despite the effort, Google still faces stiff competition from Baidu, which dominates the Chinese market share with an overwhelming 64% (Quelch


SOL Cleaning Services Essay online essay help

The main functions of an organisation’s management are: planning, organising, leading and controlling. In SOL Cleaning Services, much of the management’s responsibilities and authority have been decentralised to a team of 135 supervisors.

Each supervisor is in charge of a team of about fifty janitors, and act together to come up with their own budgets, negotiate their own contracts with clients, and hire new staff. Much of the planning function is left unto the self-managed teams. Liisa Joronen, the chairman cum owner, says, “People are ambitious and unrealistic. They set targets for themselves that are higher than what you would set for them. And because they set them, they hit them.”

The management recognises that people are creative, mindful and emotional and should be given freedom to use their brains alongside their hands. Thus, the management gives the employees full responsibility and independence in their work and each individual plans and manages their own tasks. However, the management prepares the overall company budget, which contains training programs, forthcoming occasions and organisational info, and evaluation reports that are stored in the firm’s Intranet.

SOL’s management philosophy emphasises “employee freedom, responsibility, trust, creativity and goals, as well as pleasant and professional working methods and work results.”[1] In addition to employees, each studio provides for its own equipments, tools and replenishments.

However, although the employees get a chance to do what they like, the management is actively involved in vital tasks, such as managerial decision making, allocating responsibilities and resources to the various studios. The overall company uses a unified complex sales database, on its Intranet, to track its current clients and its “most targeted accounts, when they were last contacted, by whom, and what pledges were made.”

The controlling function involves monitoring employees’ activities, keeping the firm on track towards its objectives, and taking action where necessary. In SOL, the 135 Service Supervisors perform much of the controlling function. They use advanced technologies, such as laptops and mobile phones, to function wherever they are and however they want. And to ensure that SOL’s customers and assets are protected, its employees are fully registered and adequately covered by a comprehensive insurance policy.

Although the employees work in autonomy, the management employs metrics to measure their performance. There are performance benchmarks that are established by the sales personnel and the cleaners assigned to a certain task, which the client uses to rate the cleaner’s work on a monthly basis. Even the janitors carry “quality passports” that show recommendations by clients.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The management is involved in influencing employees to inspire them to achieve the firm’s objectives. In SOL, the managers are appraised on the quality of their work rather than having superior offices or secretaries, their status symbols are not recognised thus lead as an example to the employees. It is unimaginable that Joronen, despite being an heir to one of the richest families in Finland, commutes to office on her bike.

The management recognises that most people do not admire janitors, or think of becoming one, but SOL’s management really motivates its employees rather than enforce rules to be adhered to and try to make the workplace more fun and satisfying career wise. Joronen says, “Life is hard, work is hard, but in a service business, if you’re not happy with yourself, how can you make the customer happy?”[2]

In evaluating SOL as a ‘new workplace’ or ‘old workplace,’ first let us distinguish the two categorisations. In an ‘old workplace’ employees tend to be dependable of their superiors for orders or to be assigned tasks, it adopts mechanical technology, resources are physical, work is structured or localised, it relies on domestic markets for its products and services, it has a homogenous workforce, the leadership is autocratic, conflicting environment, designed for efficient performance, and its events are calm and predictable.[3]

Contrary, the ‘new workplace’ is characterised by digital technology or e-commerce, resources are more of information, the employees are empowered free from agency and perform independently, work is flexible and virtual, it relies on global markets, it has a diverse workforce, its leadership is dispersed, it focuses at creating a workable relationship, it is a learning organisation and its events are turbulent.

From the distinction of old and new workplace, it is evident that SOL’s workplace is indeed a “new workplace.” Its features include: The employees get to choose their working time and their best place of work, since they are appraised by their output. The management is dispersed with each studio controlling its resources and it does not necessarily function from their offices, thus no status quos or autocratic kind of leadership.

The company highly embraces technologies, such as wireless phones and telecommunication networks which enable its kind of workplace to be flexible in operation and it can also conduct e-business easily targeting global markets. SOL’s president questions “Why does an office have to look like an office? Why does a low level employee try not to use his mind, and why does a high level employee try not to use his muscles?”[4]

Any organisation management’s main aim is to attain optimum performance, that is, to achieve the organisational objectives by utilising the resources with efficiency and effectiveness. The organisation’s effectiveness describes the quality of the finished product that is measured by the degree to which the firm attains a defined goal. The organisation’s effectiveness can be measured using various criteria from financial indicators to non-financial indicators.

We will write a custom Essay on SOL Cleaning Services specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More SOL’s competitive edge is the ability to plan and implement tailor-made services and managing its workforce. This has seen it succeed to be the best service provider with a high client satisfaction rank, good engagements, highly satisfied employees and goodwill as an employer and also as a service provider. SOL aims at continuously reinventing its operations so as to remain relevant in business. The company allows its clients to concentrate on their core objectives by providing for them a service experience.[5]

Organisation efficiency involves minimal utilisation of resources, that is, raw materials, capital and human resources, to achieve the expected output. “It is an issue of having the right personnel, undertaking the right work, in the best possible performance environment.

The aim is minimum duplicity, high innovation, and well managed risk.” SOL recognises the environmental impacts of its activities and its responsibility towards that, and thus runs in an eco-friendly manner to reduce environmental degradation and conserve the natural resources by using the most eco-friendly technologies.

Its employees are well trained and equipped to undertaking their work professionally. In addition, the company heavily relies on technology to run its operations, and is able to do what the company could not do years back, as Joronen recalls.

Bibliography Callender, G, Efficiency and Management, illustrated Ed. Taylor


Nike: Measurements Analysis Essay (Critical Writing) essay help free

Nike’s primary operational goals for their contract manufacturers The group strives to advance labor values in the emerging field of production by addressing poor working conditions in their contract manufacturer’s factories. There are preliminary new source accreditation processes that all suppliers of Nike undergo.

Nike has a system of deportment for its contractors that constrain their rendition of necessary industry, ecological and security values (Locke


Strategic Decision Making using Positioning and Positioning Maps Report (Assessment) argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction The environment creates opportunities for business investors to satisfy the needs created in the society while at the same time earning returns for it. Since there are several people that see the same opportunity or seize an opportunity based on the prospects of already existing businesses, businesses owners need to make strategic decisions to remain relevant to the market and increase their market share. This requires strategies based on necessary information and statistics for dealing with a competitive market environment.

The basic strategies for market entry or positioning are based on the elements of place, price, people and promotion (the 4Ps). Positioning therefore creates value in decision making for marketing purposes as an individual concept and with the use of its elements of positioning maps. Since the positioning and positioning maps are valuable and relevant in strategic marketing decision making, they can be analyzed in the context of the brewing industry.

Strategic Marketing Management Marketing is encompassed in promotion, advertising and other similar aspects. Effective marketing is mainly founded on the basis of a brand that needs to be strengthened, established or introduced in the market. Modern times are faced with competitive environment that requires marketing that succeeds in enabling a company attain a competitive advantage over its competitors by being distinguishable from them (Gordon, 2002).

Marketing is thus a broad and dynamic concept which is of high consideration in competitive industries such as the beer industry. Strategic marketing enables the businesses to use strategic marketing mix, reinforce its visibility and capacity while obtaining necessary market information and acting on it.

It relies on the aspects of Porter’s five force model for obtaining and analyzing information. The aspect of strategic marketing being dependent on the brand strength requires use of marketing as a tool for increasing its strength through identification of a market niche for it (Aaker, 2001).

Strategic decision making in marketing relies on the attributes of positioning, segmentation and effective targeting policies. Positioning and positioning maps are therefore effective strategic marketing tools for making decisions because of their ability to provide up-to-date strategic information (Stuart et al., 2001).

Summary of Positioning and Positioning Maps Positioning in marketing generally refers to the process of determining the manner of offering a product or service to the market. Positioning is very crucial since it determines the perceptions the target market receives of the company or organization (Johnson, 1995). This perception either attracts the target market or just does not interest them.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Positioning goes hand in hand with segmentation and targeting aspects. Segmentation allows the marketers to narrow down a target market on characteristics such as geographical, psycho-graphical and demographical which enables the identification of their requirements or needs to allow for positioning with the advantage of predictability of the perceptions of the segmented market (Gordon, 2002).

Positioning through targeting and segmentation takes into consideration changes that could affect the perceptions of the customers. Positioning of products or services thus entails providing product values and brands with features that are valued by the target customers and not able to be imitated by competitors (Aaker, 2001).

Positioning being a broad aspect has elements that require the identification of the product opportunities, requirements of the customers and other market considerations which can be effective through strategic representational forms. Positioning maps or perceptual maps provide comparisons of products or services based on quality and cost (Aaker, 2001). They are relevant in locating different products of the same category in a matrix of technology and style to show how value is added by incorporation of these elements (Gordon, 2002).

The Value of Positioning in Strategic Marketing Decision Making Positioning is very crucial in marketing and the extent to which it is useful in making strategic marketing decisions cannot be undermined. It is crucial in decisions of product development. Strategic decision making in marketing relies on information. The positioning of a company creates provision for access to information through increased market research which makes decision making easier and more informed.

Positioning enables an organization or company to address the needs and expectations of the target market which influence and add value to segmentation decisions. Further, the positioning of a company determines the strength of the brand whose outcome affects major decision making (Gordon, 2002).

Positioning creates a brand community from the target market which not only creates customer retention, loyalty and profits, but also facilitates the brand management which is a core decision in strategic marketing. Strategic decisions in marketing that incorporate the changes in the market such as competitions, pricing mechanisms, improvement of quality, support services to offer, product launching are all dependent on the positioning level of an organization.

The social trends, technical advances and economic factors that affect the perceptions of the customer are addressed through the positioning of the company (Aaker, 2001). The marketing tools are all related to positioning which lowers the marketing costs with better positioning and forms the foundation of major decisions such as repositioning of products or services (Stuart et al., 2001).

We will write a custom Assessment on Strategic Decision Making using Positioning and Positioning Maps specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Value of Positioning Maps in Strategic Marketing Decision Making Positioning maps are important in strategic decision making for management since first and foremost they are relevant in the determination of the product or service positioning. This is also facilitated in the decisions of segmentation and market targeting (Gordon, 2002). Perceptual maps provide insight into the potential of the product or service in a competitive environment which facilitates decision making for the maintenance of a competitive advantage.

They are also very important in the strategic marketing decision making of the identification of potential customers and other new market opportunities (Dickson, 1997). Additionally, the maps are important in the decision making process involving the marketing functions of analysis of market cluster, trends analysis to enable organizations adapt faster and objectively and in the evaluation of market concepts.

Since the positioning maps are represented graphically, they make decision making easier since explanations and the location of relationship analysis is possible. While maps play a crucial role in positioning, they facilitate research of the market relative to the brand with comparisons to competitors which makes the process of brand management, establishment and repositioning easier and more efficient (Dickson, 1997).

They help in the identification and analysis of social trends, technological advances, social factors and economic factors among others that form a major influence on the perceptions of the customers (Gordon, 2002). This is necessary for new product development that requires strategic marketing decision making.

Conclusion The value of positioning of products and services and the importance of positioning maps are crucial in strategic decision making. Positioning and positioning maps not only provide market and environment analysis, but they are also necessary in major marketing decision making and functions. This paper has provided a summary of strategic marketing and reviewed the values that positioning and positioning maps play in the strategic decision making process of management.

Reference List Aaker, D., 2001. Strategic marketing management. New York: Wiley Publications.

Dickson, P., 1997. Marketing management. New York: Dryden Press.

Gordon, W., 2002. Segmentation architecture. Marketing management, 11(2), pp.6-7.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Strategic Decision Making using Positioning and Positioning Maps by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Johnson, R., 1995. Market segmentation: A strategic management tool. Marketing Management, 3(4), pp.49-54.

Stuart, J. Kinnear, T.


Pentagon 9/11, Actions and Durations Research Paper essay help

Introduction Broadly, terrorism is defined as the use of violence on people or property for political reasons. It’s the act of causing terror or fear upon the citizens of a particular nation. It’s a political tactic used by terrorist when they believe that there is no other better way to accomplish their desire. Terrorists are the individuals who practice terrorism; they can also be referred to as the agents of terrorism since they attack nations they are opposed to.

Terrorist targets specific group of people whom they belief have a connection to a certain view of the world that they posses. In this context of terrorism, there is the Bioterrorism (an intentional and deliberate use of harmful biological substances that causes danger to human and animal health). The biological substances may not have an immediate effect like the one caused by nuclear or chemical attack but gradually causes illness.

The most used biological substances are viruses, bacteria’s, and germs. The terrorists’ major goal is to exploit the media and get control of the news cycle. They do not necessarily aim at destroying the victims, but to make them objects of exploitation to send a message to the third party which in most cases is the government or head of state. The victims are used as the first step of transmitting information to the target group. There is certain organization among the terrorists whose work is to plan which media to exploit.

The information is then transmitted to the target audience. Terrorists carry out their operations in cultures where the government has put strong security measures and their aim is to exploit individual rights and shake their fundamentals. In most cases terrorist targets are buildings in busy cities, towns, and urban centers. The targets (buildings) are highly crowded, where most people carry out their daily operations (Linden, 2007).

On the other hand, highly populated areas are points of attack whether there are existing buildings or not. For example the United States September 11, 2001 bomb blast in New York City (World trade Center), was an ideal target for causing panic. Terrorists are pleased when they cause mass panic since this is their ultimate goal; the U.S.A. is more vulnerable to this attack and has a reason to panic.

The latest and most memorable terrorist attack was on the twin towers, September 11, 2001. This paper analyses as a case study September 11, 2001, terrorist attack, it will interpolate the measures to be taken to prevent a future attack as well as the effects that such an attack have on the lives of the affected.

Methodology In reference with the case, I will use secondary data to give a detailed background on the case. I will analyze the security situation and measures that had been put in place before the attack and try to analyze the possible loopholes that were exploited by the attackers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There were a lot of physical, psychological, and emotional damages that were done on the people on United States of America by the attack; I will interpolate them from data from the media houses and from written and electronic sources. The following are the objectives of my study:

To find out the major loopholes that was exploited by the terrorists in the attack

To find out the measures that can be put in place to ensure that such an attack will not occur again.

To find out what is the most effective way to reduce water supply exposure to terrorist attack in United States and the world as a whole.

To find out how terrorism recruitment can be suppressed (my area of focus will be in Yemen)

To find out what is the most effective way to increase staff emergency preparedness training

Evolution of Terrorism Terrorism began in the 13th century during the time of the Jewish Zealots and Assassins. The Jewish Zealots attacked the Roman forces and the fellow Hebrews. The other example of ancients terrorists were the Assassins. They presumed the role of an escape party for the Nizari Ismalis who mostly used assassination on their enemies.

One of their tactics was to send a single man to kill a leader of their enemy while risking his own life. This proceeded to the 16th century in which barbarism and terror were used to scare away their enemies. This was a result of dutiful and cultural conflict amongst different communities. Later, principalities and monarchies developed into nations which used supremacy to hold back the terrorist activities.

The term terrorism was recognized in 1795 when the revolutionary government instigated terror, with its agents referred to as terrorists. They used coercion and elimination strategies on their fatalities. At the end of the American Civil war, renovations were which resulted in the establishment of the Ku Klux Klan. Diminutive activist groups became known at the end of the 19th century shaping the revolutionary.

These groups murdered the leaders of many nations including but not limited to Spain, Russia, and the United States. Corporation and association lacked in the social groups which made revolution to be an unsuccessful political group. This paved way to the communism which became powerful in the 20th century.

In the late 19th century, scientific developments were made on firearms and the revolutionary group assaulted many nations. This was the time when there was an increase in the tide of nationalism in many parts of the world in which people’s identity was combined with political state (Chaliand, 2007).

Patriotism became a sturdy force in many royally kingdoms towards the beginning of the twentieth century. A group called the Black Hand became active and could use assassination to cause terror to its enemies. This act of terrorism saw the beginning of the First World War. In early 20th century, two events occurred that prejudiced the nature of conflict to what we know today.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Pentagon 9/11, Actions and Durations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These events were the two world wars which caused a lot of damage to international and government’s legitimacy. During this period, nationalism spread all over the world and became a strong force which was subjected to people from different colonial empires. The main point of focus was the nationalist identities. Nations became more close to their ethnic ties and international politics developed.

Nations which had been denied their opportunity of existence as separate nations realized their political ambitions; terror was one of the tactics that was used to execute their struggles. Contemporary terrorism commenced in 1968 after the popular Front for Liberation of Palestine (PFLP) seized an airline in Israel. Surrounded by these assaults was the 1972 Munich Olympics assault in which 11 athletes from Israel were slaughtered.

The Palestinian Liberation Organization (LPO) concerned itself with the political attacks and was determined to search for a solution to end them. Its aspirations were opinionated which required Arafat (the leader of LPO) to stay away from terrorism in order to demonstrate to the people that he had the potential to lead a Government without the use of force.

The LPO’s terrorism acts ended and Islamic fundamentalism was spread in Middle East; this led to the emergence of the al-Qaeda and Hama. In 1979, a counter revolutionary militia was formed for the purpose of opposing the Nicaragua’s Sandinista government and in 1987 contra operating procedures were asserted where the human rights was bloodily abused.

People were raped, murdered, and others were kidnapped and property worth millions was destroyed. The target of the contras was the health care clinics and its workers. This came to an end after Violetta Chamorro was elected in 1990. Five years later, Oklahoma City was bombed and 168 people died and eight hundred people were left injured.

This bombing had been directed to the government of U.S.A. as reported by the prosecutors who were said to have carried out the offence. Some of the latest and most memorable terrorist attack is on the twin towers, September 11, 2001 and 2004; there was Spain train bombings in Madrid and other bombings in United Kingdom and London. Since then, U.S.A. has been experiencing terrorist attacks which have continuously caused fear among the residents.

The motive that was cited for the attack was the support of United State to Israel, trade sanction to Iraq, and its presence in Saudi Arabia. All these motives had been proclaimed earlier before the attack for example fatwa of August 1996. These motives were reinforced when bin Laden and al-Zawahiri after the attack repeated movies and documentaries stating the earlier warnings that the United States had been given (Chaliand, 2007).

September 11 2001 Historical Background Of the recent past the attack is one of the major attacks that made the biggest destruction. The United States is considered as one of the most powerful country in terms of economic power and military preparedness but despite this the attack was made successful. It was made in a way that the security team could not detect. It occurred on two buildings (World Trade Centre and Pentagon) that were prime attacks from the attacker’s point of view. After the attack were done by al-Qaeda.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Pentagon 9/11, Actions and Durations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In 1996, Bin Laden, called on for American troops to get out of gulf of Saudi Arabia, he claimed that Prophet Muhammad was against permanent presence of American troops in Saudi Arabia. In the 1998 fatwa, Al-Qaeda wrote,

for over seven years the United States has been occupying the lands of Islam in the holiest of places, the Arabian Peninsula, plundering its riches, dictating to its rulers, humiliating its people, terrorizing its neighbors, and turning its bases in the Peninsula into a spearhead through which to fight the neighboring Muslim peoples (National Commission on Terrorist Attacks upon the United States, Thomas,


Australian Rail Organization: The Existence of Porter’s 5 Forces Report (Assessment) online essay help: online essay help

Rail Australia is undoubtedly the leading organization in the provision of rail transport and passenger services in Australia. Major rail operators in Australia have formed an alliance to deliver joint tourist-oriented and passenger services. Rail operations and infrastructure are not only owned and managed by government agencies but also by private operators. Rail operators include Countrylink, Great Southern Rail, Transwa and Traveltrain Holidays (Rail Australia, 2010).

Countrylink offers long distance services to travelers in New South Wales and other 360 destinations. Traveler services include XPT, XPLORER and the Country Coach Network. Great Southern Rail is tourism oriented and service operations offered by this operator include the Overland, Indian Pacific and the Ghan.

Transwa is a regional transporter in Western Australia and it services more than 275 destinations. The last operator in the organization is Traveltrain Holidays which delivers diversified services to both long distance passengers and tourists. It also offers a number of distinct travel packages tailored to suit all customers.

Porter’s 5 Forces in the industry Traditional competition is very high because of the existence of stiff competition as evidenced by the number of distinguished rail service providers. Each service provider aims to be the leading in the industry in the satisfaction of traveler needs and thusly the continuous diversification of traveler packages. Profitability within the industry is influenced by the delivery of customized packages to suit every clientele. For instance, almost every operator offers more than three types of service operations based on the targeted market.

Porter’s 5 forces existing in the Australian rail organization are confirmed by rivalry in market control within the industry. There is high entry of substitute products and services into the market. This is well explained by the highly diversified traveler packages provided by the different rail operators.

Horizontal forces include the ever changing alternative passenger and tourist packages. The diversification of service operations forces operators to develop new products. Established rail operators are also using their economies of scale to increase their profitability levels as well as funding their operation levels.

The last among the horizontal forces is the threats associated with the entry of new operators (Porter, 2000). The entry of new rail service providers is low because other rail operators are very established and are jointly owned by the organization. Therefore the major obstacle faced by new entrants is establishing their services to compete with those standards prevailing in the industry and partly due to the lack of economies of scale (Laudon and Laudon, 2006).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The customer’s bargain power is high because there is availability of a variety of travel packages from where they can choose from. They determine vertical competition due to their service tastes and preferences. This is the reason for the existence of differentiated service packages among the service operators designed to suit their needs.

On the other hand, supplier’s bargaining power is low as evidenced by the diversified range of services on offer. The customers are well informed of the services forcing the suppliers to instill some element of bargaining power to woo customers to purchase the travel packages.

Strategies and recommendations The availability of competition within an organization in the same industry is not a good idea because the management of operations is run by one single body (Rainer


HIV/ AIDS in the UK Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

General Country Information Official Country Name: United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland

Continent and Region: Europe and Western Europe

Neighbouring States: France and Ireland

Governmental System: Constitutional Monarchy

Economic System: Liberal service based economy

Head of State: Prime Minister David Cameron (CIA, 2010)

Member of International Political Organizations (e.g. NATO)? NATO- a founding member and also the Commonwealth. A Security Council member of the UN. It also belongs to the G-8, IMF, Paris Club , Australia Group, IFC and many others such as Interpol.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Member of International Economic Organizations (e.g. ASEAN)? OECD, IEA, G-20, ILO, IMO, EAPC and BIS

Member of Other International Organizations? It is in the European Union. Nonetheless, it has chosen not to implement some of the issues surrounding the Monetary or Economic Issues.

Total population. 61, 284, 806

Average Life Expectancy. 79.16 years

Literacy rate (%). 99

Official Language. English

Major religion(s). Christianity accounting for 71.6%, Islam -2.7% and Hindu-1%

We will write a custom Research Paper on HIV/ AIDS in the UK specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Allies. US, France and Ireland

Major trade partners. US (Biggest trading partner), France, Germany, Belgium, Spain, Netherlands and Ireland

Countries with which your Country has friendly/adverse relations. Conflicted with Spain over autonomy, Argentina over Island territories, Iraq, Afghanistan and other Arab Nations over involvement in the US led 2002 invasion of Afghanistan and Iraq.

Former Colonial Powers (if applicable). Not applicable

Former Colonies (if applicable). India, South Africa, Zimbabwe, Nigeria, Uganda, Tanzania, Kenya, Ghana, Egypt (CIA, 2010)

History of United Kingdom Early history. England was in place from 10TH C, It then joined forces with Wales in 1284 and then included Scotland in 1707. In 1801, Ireland was made part of Great Britain but was later partitioned in 1921 to leave only Northern Ireland as part of the UK.

Recent history. The country has recently been fighting for constitutional reform. It has also been at the forefront of instating devolutions. Its involvement in the EU has made a continental and hence a global force intended on influencing other nations’ foreign policy. The UK enjoyed high economic growth in the last half of the twentieth century and the early twenty first, however, the global economic recession tool a toll on them. It has also been struggling with territorial defences over assemblies by Northern Ireland. (CIA, 2010)

HIV/AIDS Four major threats affecting my state

The United Kingdom is confronted with a series of challenges. Obesity has become a serious cause for concern. This has permeated across all major age groups, including the youth and members of the older population. Several awareness campaigns have been launched through the media and other concerns in order to reduce obesity and hence the other health complications that arise from it. Secondly, crime is a pressing problem as well.

Not sure if you can write a paper on HIV/ AIDS in the UK by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is especially common in the major cities like London. Matters have been worsened by high immigration rates which have been linked to this trend in subsequent times. (Weild, 1998) In order to solve the problem, police and prison reforms have been instated. Mental illness as a social challenge has also taken on centre stage. Concerns over providing proper medical care to these groups of individuals has been raised. Teenage pregnancies are also another crucial issue as well. (Pickett


Texting while driving should be illegal Essay online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



Works Cited

Introduction Texting while one is driving can be defined as that act whereby one sends, reads, emails or composes text messages through the mobile phone while at the same time operating a motor vehicle (Ishigami


Environmental and Cultural Impact of Bottled Water Report writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Abstract




Reference List

Abstract An entrenched belief in people’s minds that bottled water is superior to tap water has triggered a chain of environmental and cultural challenges to policy makers and environmentalists in conserving the environment and while ensuring quality water for consumers.

The problem of disposing water bottles by enforcing policies for responsible waste bottle disposal, alternative forms of producing water bottles that are environmentally friendly and economically viable alternatives to justify the existence of water bottling industries in the society defines the problem statement.

Specifically, the approach to solving the problem will span a careful investigation into the effects of bottled water and waste bottles in the environment, through the collection and analysis of primary data, interviewing company executives that bottle water, and analyze methods used to curb environmental pollutions. Inn conclusion, these could result in efficient approaches to waste bottle disposal, provision of clean water in harmony with environmental and cultural environment and effective policy formulation and enforcement.

Introduction Many and divergent views have been held over time by consumers of bottled water. Specifically, bottled water consumers have regarded this water as safe and of good quality for consumption. This belief has generated a chain of environmental and cultural concerns for policy makers and enforcers over the production and ineffective disposal methods.

The research will focus on the impact and enforcement of disposal policies and environmental pollution, conduct an investigation into various areas, analyze different research methods, analyze research methods and draw conclusions from the study for effective approaches to environmental conservation in harmony with the cultural environment.

The research will come up with strategic approaches to enforcing policies for environmental conservation, excellent and alternative methods of bottled water manufacture and better and viable alternatives for fuel saving in the production process.

Body Thesis statement: Bottled water has had diverse environmental and cultural impacts spanning policy formulation and enforcement strategies. According to Hall (2007, p. 7), bottled water is a widely consumed product. This is an industry that many companies have strategically invested in. The wide usages of these products have environmental and cultural consequences that need to be addressed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Goodman (2009, p.3), waste bottles when ineffectively disposed of litter and lead to environmental pollution that in the end become both culturally and environmentally destructive. This concern and the approaches used to manufacture these bottles is a course for concern to the researcher. In addition to that, the quest to provide quality water and efficient manufacturing processes and policy enforcement strategies will be the basis of the research.

The specific audience will span policy makers and law enforcement agencies, environmental conservation groups and agencies, manufacturing and recycling companies, water bottling companies and individual consumers.

To effectively formulate and implement policies for environmental conservation, the research will analyze the impact of those policies, analyze the quality of water in these bottles, the extent to which current bottle disposal approaches have polluted the environment, analyze consumer behavior and attitudes, company manufacturing and packaging methods, and critically look at available literature spanning all aspects of culture, the environment, and water consumption (Sharfstein, 2010, p. 1).

Conclusion According to the research proposal, an analysis of the environmental impact of disposing waste water bottles, disposal methods, manufacturing methods, policy formulation and enforcement in the manufacturing methods and use of these bottles, and the quality of water sold out to the consumer formed the backbone of the research.

In addition to that, various cultural attachments and consumer attitudes besides the recycling strategies and possible alternatives or efficient recycling methods and efficient fuel usage in the whole process was a vital consideration in the research.

Reference List Goodman, S. (2009). Fewer regulations for bottled water than tap, GAO says. Web.

Hall, N. (2007). Federal and State Laws Regarding Bottled Water – An Overview and Recommendations for Reform. Web.

We will write a custom Report on Environmental and Cultural Impact of Bottled Water specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sharfstein. J.M. (2010). “Regulations of bottled water”. Web.


“The Tale of the Heike” Report essay help online free

Historical Background and Aspects of Japanese Culture that Are Portrayed This takes a story line that is written in 12 chapters of which each discusses a certain issue in an interesting manner. It discusses the stories of 12th century and the main focus is the transition of Chinese and the Japanese. The setting of the story portrays the Japanese as people with honor, deceit, and brave.

It is a war set book that gives the tale of decline and tragic downfall of Taira clan, which according to the standards of the time was a mighty clan during the fateful five years after 1180. There were also individuals that did not have these characters but there were mechanism that was set to discipline them. This is the initial stage that the belief of the Japanese (of being brave and adventurous) is portrayed.

Taira had risen as a result of great leadership of Kiyomori after the Hogen and Heiji disturbances. This portrays the value that the Japanese had placed on their leader. He is seen to be the most successful leader and after the success he aimed at dominating other clans politically. This is the greed of power that has existed in the country even today.

After gaining power, there was a lot of concentration in art, a feature that have prevailed even presently, this however made the leader to forget about the warriors. They were (after two decades) defeated and the clan failed. In the story there is a direct reinforcing of a Japanese notion that everything has an end however long it seems to stay, there comes a day and it comes to an end. The story also reinforces the Buddhist notion of karma.

This is when they portray that everybody is haunted by the sins that he committed yesterday. However prosperous he may be, he eventually will have to regret the ills that he did. This is portrayed where before killings soldiers are supposed to seek for divine intervention.

The religion and the belief of superstitions are portrayed in the story. There is the belief that there is a super power that exist in the universe that human beings are mandated to respect. The sense of humor that is portrayed in the book is a model of the normal life that the Japanese existence generally has[1].

The Image of the Area as Well as the Authority Setting The story line is centered in the life of a clan called the Taira that had emerged to great heights after a good leadership. During that time the society lived as clans and the clan that dominated in the area was the one that ruled the others. This is through the wars that they had in the time. There were various ambushes that each clan made to the other. After an attack had been done the victorious people would move with properties that they were able to carry from the other clan[2].

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The chiefdom of the area was hereditary; a son could take over from the father. There was a council that was supposed to assist the chief in making various decisions in the kingdom. A victorious chief’s measure was the wealth that he was able to accumulate from the concurred clans.

Reference List DeBARY, Theodore et al. Sources of Japanese Tradition, vol. 1: From Earliest Times to 1600. New York. Columbia University Press, 2001, pp. 276-280

Footnotes DeBARY, Theodore et al. Sources of Japanese Tradition, vol. 1: From Earliest Times to 1600. New York. Columbia University Press, 2001, pp. 276-280

DeBARY, Theodore et al. Sources of Japanese Tradition, vol. 1: From Earliest Times to 1600. New York. Columbia University Press, 2001, pp. 276-280


Analysis of Advertisements in Magazines Essay essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

Analysis of Magazine Advertisements

Shape Magazine

Marie Claire Magazine

New Idea Magazine


Works Cited

Introduction Advertisement forms have changed over the years with each period suited to fit the target audience. Technological developments in print have improved the quality of magazine advertisements and increased target audience market coverage.

Although technological improvements with online versions of magazines have improved, the print version has maintained a significant market share and demand. Magazines have narrowed their target audience with considerations such as gender, race, age, education levels among others which however do not prohibit those not targeted from accessing the magazines. The advertisements in the magazines, articles discussed, and cover pages fit the magazines’ target audience.

Magazine publications have a rich history of fashion, beauty, celebrity, recipes among other topical issues in the generation of the target audience. Women have many issues surrounding them and hence women magazines have existed over the years. Since these magazines have existed over several decades, it is important to analyze them with comparisons between the times in terms of objectives, changes and differences, target audience, messages and images covered.

Analysis of Magazine Advertisements The women magazines in the market all are different in their target audience though covering similar issues. The years of origin, background and purposes also differ and change over time to accommodate generational changes (Hough-Yates 112). This analysis shall focus on Shape magazine, Marie Claire magazine and New Idea magazine.

Shape Magazine Just as the name suggests, Shape Magazine is a women magazine that focuses on their fitness to attain the shape presumed to be preferable for the period of discussion. It is written in English language and its origin dates back to 1981 by Weider publications. This analysis shall involve the years 1983 and 2010 for Shape Magazine.

Shape Magazine in 1983

The 1980s decade was characterized by a pop culture and music which influenced the dancing style of the time. It is during this period that the concept of aerobics was introduced from the dance halls to the gym.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Health fitness of the time was based on keeping fit. Gyms were beginning to increase though not as much. Celebrity fitness formed the basis of fitness magazine advertisements. Shape magazine in 1983 targeted women of all years into fitness though it did not have age-specific articles. The products advertised at the time were mainly swim suits, fitness and gym wears.

The magazine did not emphasize on diet though dietary articles were present. The messages were based on maintenance of fit bodies, encouragement of aerobics, and use of celebrity fitness to influence women into fitness programs. The images mainly included women in swim suits to reveal the shapely bodies with the focus of celebrities of the time (Gough-Yates 208).

Shape Magazine in 2010

The fitness culture increased in the 2010 period with issues of weight loss, style and beauty, health and increase dietary consciousness. Shape magazine still targets women in the 2010 year with its base on their fitness and has a sexual appeal, which is, encouraging fitness as a way of being sexy. The implicit messages in the magazine do provide direct and increased scope coverage of fitness issues.

It allows the responses of the audience and then carries out research on such issues and publishes them. Fitness for shape magazines are based more on losing weight as a way of being fit and sexy such as obtaining a flat stomach, increased advice on healthy eating and dieting, increased coverage of women celebrities work outs, lifestyles and advice, different articles on losing of weight and how to attain a perfect shape faster, videos on work outs and other beauty and style issues.

The products advertised in Shape magazine are very many and fall into the category of the article discussed including fitness gadgets, dietary books, work out programs, beauty products, dieting products, slimming products, weight management mechanisms and evaluation products among others. The images are more on expert advice on weight related issues; they include celebrities and have a sexual appeal added to them.

Shape magazine is similar to that of 1983 in the target audience, images especially cover images with swim suits although those of 1983 emphasize on the sexual appeal and include more celebrities. Shape magazine in 2010 further increases the scope of fitness coverage, increases articles on diet and health as well as emphasizes on weight loss.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of Advertisements in Magazines specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Marie Claire Magazine This is a fashion magazine that dates back to 1937, written in the English language and dominated more in the US, Australia and UK and in other languages for other nations though it was published earlier in France. The target audience of the magazine is specific to the country with that of US targeting women in the world.

The magazine from its origin has been addressing issues in the world affecting women with information on beauty, fashion and health. The magazine has maintained the objective of providing its readers with information substantial enough on the changing and new looks and the fashionable styles of the time. This analysis shall compare 1930s and 2008.

Marie Claire Magazine in 1938

The magazine was issued on a weekly basis in France and based its topics affecting the women with the target on the middle class women. The issues included the discrimination of women, how to be home keepers, and the social environment since women were expected to be conservative and feminine taking their place in the home (Gough- Yates, 157). Divorce was prohibited at the time and issues could not be openly discussed.

During this time, the images were of the fashionable hats and were captured to show only that with the concept of beauty being confined, conservative and more on the hair styles. The magazine included the trends of fashion based on women of high class such as the queen. The products advertised were not much and included the same hats, hair beauty and beauty products especially the lipsticks while the distributing systems were minimal.

Marie Claire in 2008

The magazine is published on a monthly basis and the theme issues addressed target the ordinary woman. The magazine provides up to date information on fashion with changes in fashion trends.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of Advertisements in Magazines by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Unlike in the 1930s, the fashion trends represented change within short time with the introduction of fashion themes in the earlier years. The issues discussed in the magazine are more liberal and range from health, family matters, marriage, celebrity styles, fitness, health, beauty and other concerns such as legal matters, financial issues, relationships and careers among others (Gauntlett 314).

The images are of high quality and represent the modern woman permeating to all ages capturing all fashion trends in sports wear, make up, clothes for different occasions including fashion during pregnancy, work, party among others, celebrity styles, hair styles and fashion expert advice services. Other than fashion, the magazine is inclined to women beauty, fitness and health.

The magazines carries forth massive advertisements touching on the issues discussed such clothes, beauty products, hair products, services, health matters, fitness and fitness products, family related products, tours and travel advertisements, fashion stores among others. The stories represent issues faced by women with emphasis on confidence and justice and more inclination to providing celebrity styles (Gough-Yates 134).

New Idea Magazine This is a weekly published magazine in Australia targeting the women. It dates back to 1902 with coverage of issues and news around and affecting celebrities, recipes and competitions. This analysis shall focus on 1982 and 2010.

New Idea Magazine in 1982

In this period, the magazine focused on issues surrounding celebrities, fashion and beauty trend with emphasis on celebrities’ lifestyles, cooking recipes of the time, health issues, art work and competitions. The products were mainly representing the items used by celebrities of the times and of high costs and quality. The images used were mainly of people of high profile and fitted into the high quality of the times (Gauntlett 217).

New Idea Magazine in 2010

The magazine is still published weekly in Australia with the target still being women. The magazine mainly covers celebrity stories, events and lifestyles, topical issues, cooking recipes of the modern times and still includes competitions and special offers. The magazine is closely related to that at the 1980s only the application to the times differs and the wider coverage where the audience are able to provide their comments on the blog through electronic media.

Conclusion The target audience for the magazines discussed has not really changed over the time. The magazines however such as Mari Claire has increased its content scope in fashion with more liberalism, the Shape magazine has maintained its focus but increased coverage with more emphasis on diet and weight loss and focus on the body shape.

The new idea magazine has not differed from its earlier publications both in content or coverage but just in use of electronic media. The relevance of the women magazines has proved to thus permeate and maintain relevance with applications to the trends in the times.

Works Cited Gauntlett, David. Media, gender and Identity: An introduction. London: Routledge Publications, 2008.

Gough-Yates, Anna. Understanding Women’s Magazines. London: Routledge Publications, 2002.


Use of Technology for GE Essay essay help: essay help

Outline Introduction

– Under this section, the importance of technology in the efficient running of an organization is explored


-This section examines the use of information technology by GE and how some of the policies on use of internet from various countries could impact on the expansion program of GE. In addition, the section also employees’ issues related to use of technology and the consequences of failing to comply with the established guidelines.


-Here, the importance of information technology for an organization with a global reach as GE is recaptured for purposes of enhancing the company’s efficient operation.

Introduction For any organization that wishes to maintain a competitive edge in the market, there is need to embrace technology. This is because the proper harnessing of technology helps an organization to become more efficient in its operations. There are many benefits that come about when an organization embraces technology. To further explore some of these benefits, this research paper shall explore the use of technology by General Electric (GE).

Discussion Many countries have embraced the use of the internet albeit with some questions being raised (Abbate, 1999, p. 12).GE has been involved in a massive expansion program to enhance its global presence. As a matter of fact, some of the policies implemented by various countries that deals with the use of information technology may affect GE’s ability to expand further globally.

There are many issues that come about once an organization with a global presence as GE decides to expand. With the use of internet, employee’s issues related to use of information technology often crops up. It is important for an organization to address such issues as they cannot be ignored.

Because there are many opportunities for expansion, issues relating to work have posed a big challenge as a result of the need to implement them in line with the established guidelines (Abbate, 1999, p. 15).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On certain occasions, the issue of global supply chain control arises. As a result, we could end up with restricted the flow of business (just because they have to be adhered to). In addition to these, there have also been issues that relate to international tax compliance and structuring. This have in most occasions eroded the vast opportunities that are available due to the extremes in this scenario.

New technology has always presented a lot of opportunities for adoption by businesses. However, this has on certain occasions been overshadowed by certain issues that need to be explored further (Castells, 1996, p.4). The internet has been viewed as a great way of doing business by consumers in many countries and this explains its wide use all over the globe. Consumers in many countries have embraced the internet and therefore see it as a very efficient way of advancing their lives.

However, the internet has been used suspiciously due to privacy issues where some customers have feared that whatever they are doing might not be private at all (Castells, 1996. P.7). Consumers will be less concerned about internet privacy if they are convinced that they are secure in whatever they are doing online in all occasions.

Because of some complains and the exposure that the internet puts to many customers some governments have come up with consumer protection laws to ensure that indeed they are protected. The presence of such laws though in some instances has redefined business they have also been critical.

In spite of all these shortcomings, consumers still view the internet as an avenue for accessing numerous business opportunities that would otherwise have remained impossible to achieve. Since GE has a global presence in its business operations, there is need for the organization to adjust its operational procedures.

The first thing to do is to ensure that its operations are well coordinated to avoid any leaks that might end up being used to its disadvantage in other countries. Since GE is involved in global business, it has to abide by the various laws and business guidelines that have been put in place by those countries (Castells, 1996, p. 9). Its operations might have to be too involving (that is; by involving all the stakeholders) for them to succeed.

Personal and organizational responsibilities for moral and ethical use of technology Despite the need to adopt technology in order to compete in today’s world, an organization must determine, develop and implement methods of anticipating and responding to issues that may arise from technological activities.

We will write a custom Essay on Use of Technology for GE specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Any industrial corporation worldwide that is utilizing technology must be able to respond to social needs. Proactive philosophy is a responsive approach that companies using technology must adhere to. It is important to anticipate problems before they occur and develop approaches of dealing with those problems.

This is one of the key issues that an organization can extend to its internal and external stakeholders as well as to the general community. The other key issue is adapting to accommodation philosophy. This means doing more that the minimum expectation from the public policy. Related to this is the need to avoid any illegal act that will affect the society at large. Such include having harmful emissions from the adopted technology.

Technological advancements like steam engines and electricity can be used for not only good but also to commit social crime hence threatening social values. With this in mind, it is important to have ethical considerations in the use of technology. Some of the moral responsibilities associated with technology include:

The information rights and obligations This includes the information rights that individual and organizations have on the technology as well as to themselves.

System quality

This explains about the standards of system and data quality and whether it protects individual’s rights as well as the society’s safety.

Property rights and obligations

This dictates the protection that traditional intellectual rights have in relation to the digital society. This is because accounting for their ownership may be difficult and hence easily forgotten.

Quality of life

This explains about the values that must be retained in the knowledge-based society.

Accountability and control

This questions about who will be held accountable and liable for the harms caused on individuals and the organization, the information therein as well as the rights of the property

Not sure if you can write a paper on Use of Technology for GE by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion If at all General Elects aspires to have a competitive edge in the market, it is important for the company to fully embrace information technology in all its operations. In addition, there is need for the organizations to ensure that its workforce fully comply with the established guidelines regarding the use of the internet.

Reference List Abbate, J. (1999). Inventing the Internet. Cambridge: MIT Press,

Castells, M. (1996). Rise of the Network Society. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishers


Meaning of Emotions Essay best essay help

Table of Contents Meaning of emotion words

Facial Expression


Meaning of emotion words This research method was based on the meaning derived from words describing emotional experiences people experienced. These emotionally descriptive words target specific emotional feelings. Different emotional words convey distinctly different emotional feelings from a specific audience and situation.

A word like love for example could convey a unique sense of belonging and satisfaction. The research approach led to the invention of specific words for specific situations. According to this method, a specific word could convey subjective feelings that led to the creation of categories of emotions. Analytically, semantics was the basis of five categories of emotions. The meaning of words approach was characterized by the basic elements of happiness, sadness, anger, fear, and disgust.

Based on the meaning of words approach, a survey conducted on people received diverse responses on their perception and categorization of emotion in their own minds. The survey involved administering several cards on people to fill in emotional words and the cards sorted were sorted into various categories based on one’s best judgment.

According to Tomkins (1981, 87) the results indicated a degree of agreement on the positive and negative emotions. Words like contentment and desire could be placed in the positive category while words like fury and worry could be placed on the negative side of the category. Further research and statistical analysis concluded with six categories as the most appropriate classification for the meaning of words research approach (Tomkins 1981, 100).

The method consists of six categories with sub-categories that led to a universal classification of words for the meaning of words research method. The meaning of words theory

Facial Expression This research method was based on the fact that facial expressions corresponded to specific emotions. Emotional expressions were internal and in every human being. An individual is able to differentiate between pleasant and those emotions that were unpleasant. Despite all these, the face could not provide information that could be graded on a scale of the intensity of emotions.

In addition to that, cultural and biological factors were significant factors in determining facial expressions. Thus, when a facial expression was not experienced, there was thought to be no underlying emotional feelings (Steiner 1973, 5).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Research findings based on this method revealed the relationship between facial expressions and the intensity of an emotion. Higher or intense emotional feelings caused intense facial expressions and vice versa. Illustrated in the theory were emotional feelings such as that of happiness and sadness on specific categories.

Steiner (1973) argues that this method identified human beings as being unique in exhibiting facial expressions and their ability to express their emotional feelings such as laughs, coughs, etc. Human beings, according to this research method had a significant ability to signal self-conscious emotions such as embarrassments.

According to the reach method, human beings have the ability to evaluate the feelings and attitudes of others towards them about their feelings and thus regulate their actions. A human being could evaluate expressions like a weak smile, a tilt of the head, and pride with corresponding emotional effects to regulate their actions.

This theory also employed the fact of measuring muscular movements of the face, patterns of movement, temporary movement of the skin, changes in skin features and size of a facial expression, and other movements.

References Steiner, J. E. (1973). The gustofacial response: Observation on normal and anencephalic newborn infants. In J. F. Bosma (Ed.), Fourth symposium an oral and per sensation ception. Bethesda, Md.: U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare.

Tomkins, S. S. (1981). The role of facial response in the experience of emotion. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 40, 35-1-357.


Conception of Lifelong Learning in Society Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction Lifelong learning may be advocated as a response to economic and technological change in relation to education workplace and the notions of advanced liberalism and a teacher as an accountable professional in an education ‘market place’, it is necessary to define a number of key terms in the essay which have relation to lifelong learning.

This essay will also encompass a social-cultural aspect by means of expanding and identifying the differences between neo-liberalism and advanced liberalism. Lifelong learning has been also advocated through the economical and technological changes that also happen in relation to advanced liberalism and the existed Australian schooling system.

The ways in which diversity, equity and inclusivity are promoted and distinguished will be also evaluated in order to explain the process of facilitation consultative, collaborative, and critical relationships across diverse learning environments, communities and cultures. The discourse and development that is determined by the devolution and understanding of advanced liberalisms in relation to lifelong learning and the teacher as an accountable professional in an educational market place will be discussed as well.

Lifelong Learning Concept: Key Terms Lifelong education presupposes an idea of constant knowledge exchange due to which people store information and help their generations to make use of the already made achievements properly. This process may be one of the most successful examples of devolution that is defined by Whitty (1998) as a successful passing down through a number of stages.

The first introduction to lifelong learning can be seen through the works of John Dewey who promoted a curriculum focused on lifelong learning. In such learning children are to be prepared for success through personal, intellectual, and social development (Westbrook, 1991). This concept was introduced by the UNESCO in the early 1970s as a means of equalizing earning and responding with the social demands greater opportunities (“Extending learning opportunities: adult education and lifelong learning,” 2001, p. 31).

Crick and Wilson (2005) state continuous learning takes place during one’s lifespan including formal and informal education and self-directed learning. Such knowledge is essential within the liberal doctrine, in which a new relation can be witnessed between the government and knowledge, in which learning is only a part of such knowledge flowing around a diversity of apparatuses (Miller


Whether or Not to Uphold Business Ethics Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Carroll’s Pyramid Model of CSR

Using Carroll’s model to explain my position on the topic

Backing up my position using Carroll’s 4stages of CSR


List of References

Introduction Perhaps everyone agrees that businesses perform several possible activities, when striving to achieve their primary aim of making profits. However, the point of contention comes in; on the way the activities are handled and executed. The controversy often regards the question of whether to uphold the law, or adhere to the business ethics. Some argue that, only the law should be upheld; whereas, others advocate for both the law and ethics.

Carroll’s Pyramid Model of CSR Carroll, a prominent professor, tremendously represented his ideologies using a conceptual model. The professor of business ethics used three-dimensional concepts, to present his thoughts about the roles of an organization (Carroll, 2004, 114). He began by defining the social roles of an organization; followed by noting the social concerns associated with the social tasks; then finally noted the motivation of organizations that respond to social roles.

In his model, Carroll proceeded to list the four primary responsibilities of an organization. Economic responsibility was the first role of a company described by Carroll. He explicated that; a company must fulfill its economical obligations of making profits (Huniche,


Importance of dreams in the Epic of Gilgamesh Essay best essay help

In the Gilgamesh story, dreams have been given great prominence especially since they play a critical part in explaining the unfolding of events. The two main characters Gilgamesh and Enkidu constantly dream about things and events which contribute positively to their lives as well as help give meaning to the story. In the period of the story, the Mesopotamians held the common belief that dreams were a method of communication between human beings and their ancestors.

In the dream where a meteor dropped from the sky, Gilgamesh’s mother, Ninsun, interpreted it as a sign of the arrival of a powerful person who would seek to challenge Gilgamesh’s authority (Shin-eqi-Unninni 15). She also said that after Gilgamesh fails to take down the assailant an interpretation arrived at from Gilgamesh’s revelation that he “ tried to lift it but it proved too heavy.

All the people of Uruk came round to see it” (Shin-eqi-Unninni 15). Ninsun also claimd that they (Gilgamesh and the stranger) would combine forces to become a formidable team which would live up to their greatness. This interpretation came to pass when he (Gilgamesh) meets with Enkidu in the duel at the wedding banquet.

As it happens, the two struggle with each other before they eventually agree to become friends. The importance of the dream in this instance was to prepare Gilgamesh for the event. As far as the development of the plot is concerned, this dream and its subsequent interpretation, help create a sense of anticipation. The reader finds him/herself pushing through the story hoping to find out whether the dream came to be true or not.

Enkidu dreams about his own death in a vision that depicts him infront of a council of gods. In the dream, Enkidu believes that Shamhat is the one responsible for his weakened state but later, at the intervention of Shamash, he is able to see things in a broader perspective and blesses the woman (Shin-eqi-Unninni 26-27).

In line with the dream, Enkidu falls sick for twelve days and eventually passes on, urging Gilgamesh not to forget him. By the time this dream appears in the story, the reader is already aware that it is bound to come true, but one reads on hoping that Enkidu would somehow find a loophole that would take him away from the fate predicted by the dream.

The prophetic dreams that both Gilgamesh and Enkidu have are used to show the weaknesses of man in front of destiny. This is because, even as powerful as the two individuals are, they cannot change tragic events that lay in their life paths. These dreams become some sort of satire as the two individuals have the strength to handle most of life’s unexpected challenges but they cannot summon enough authority to handle things that they are sure are coming.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Enkidu tries to find a scapegoat by blaming the lady Shamhat for his own shortcomings in his pre-death premonition (Shin-eqi-Unninni 27). His disappointment at dying a weak man’s death is evident from the story and one would be tempted to blame him for not responding to earlier challenges adequately.

Dreams have been used repeatedly in the epic story with an aim of emphasizing the Mesopotamian cultural and religious beliefs. It is less likely that the dreams would have had great significance to individuals from different cultural backgrounds and the reader is also left wondering whether the events in the story would have come out the same way had the interpreters given different explanations. This means that the dreams could also have been used to create some form of rhetorical questioning in the minds of the readers.

Works Cited Shin-eqi-Unninni. “Gilgamesh”. The Norton Anthology of World Literature, Vol A: Beginnings to A.D. 100. Eds. Sarah Lawall et al. New York: W.W. Norton


How the Information and System Assurance Theory and Methodology Impacted an Actual Company in the Last 10 Years Report (Assessment) essay help: essay help

Abstract Any business entity requires proper management to avoid situations that would lead to its imminent collapse and eventually, loss of investment. For this reason, business owners should be very cautious when decided on the auditing firms to examine their books of accounts.

A lot of business enterprises have collapsed due to poor management, inexperienced leaders, or because of incompetent auditors. In this case, when auditors malfunction while carrying out their duties, this greatly affects the operations of an enterprise. For this reason, there is need to ensure that auditors execute their duties efficiently to avoid compromising the operation of an enterprise.

Introduction Auditing is a critical activity in the operations of a business entity. In the past, poor performance by auditors has led to the collapse of many businesses. Auditors are charged with the responsibility of undertaking the auditing activities of a company.

According to Apostolon and Crumbley (2008, para. 1), audit is an independent examination of the accounts of the enterprise by an independent auditor. For an auditor to successfully undertake their duties, he or she needs to be familiar with the internal control systems of an enterprise. The auditor should ensure that the internal control systems are strong enough to guarantee fair running of the business.

These controls should avoid overriding of such a system to earn a favor. Internal control failures have led to the collapse of many businesses. In this case, Shearman and Sterling (2009, p.2) highlights the case of a company that was penalized as a result of deficits in the internal control systems in one of its subsidiary called ACL Technologies. According to the partnership, the internal control failures included the following:

Inadequate financial controls

The internal control systems at the firm in question were so poor such that executives were allowed to make large payments to agents without proper authorization. It is important to note that internal controls should not give executives exceptional rights to deal with the resources of an enterprise at their own wish. There should be a maximum amount of resources that the executives should be allowed to exercise. Any amount beyond the stated maximum should be authorized by the right authority.

Inadequate documentation

The services which were allegedly provided by the agent were not properly documented. The internal control systems with respect to recording and documentation were weak. This led to non documentation of the services which the agent purported to have rendered to the subsidiary. This created a leeway for defrauding the company by inflating the cash payable to the agent.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lack of due diligence

The agent failed to observe his work carefully. He engaged himself in careless dealings which led to the organization operating at a loss. On the other hand, the organization failed to establish adequate internal control systems that would have overseen the activities of the agent. If the subsidiary had established a strong internal control system, then the company would have learnt of the danger earlier.

Lack of audit rights

There was lack of audit rights on the contract with the agent. The subsidiary engaged in contracts with the agent without audit rights. In 1996, the ACL Technologies, Inc, a firm based in California, sought to secure a contract to construct Egyptian Air Force’s aircrafts. In 1999, The Egyptian Air Force (EAF) was sought for a sole source contract from the United States Air Force (USAF).

This would have helped to secure the contract to build the F-depot to ACL Technologies. Afterwards, the United States Air Force awarded the contract to the ACL. In the years that followed, the ACL sought and secured another contract. Between the years 1999 and 2004, the contracts that ACL had secured generated U.S dollars 64 million in revenue and U.S dollars 8.6 million in net profit for ACL.

The allegations by the Security and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) focuses on the payments related to a specific contract. The ACL managed to secure the contract in April, 2002. The Egyptian military employees would then train with the ACL to effectively start their operations on the F-16 depot. According to statistics, the contract generated revenue amounting to U.S $5.3 million and a net profit of U.S $267,000.

The Security and Exchange Commission detailed a series of communications between the Egyptian Air Force Agent and Thomas Wurzel, the then president of ACL. According to the case, communications started back in 2001. The case outlines efforts made to raise funds. These funds were to be used to motivate, secure team loyalty and the business, and satisfy people. In addition, SEC detailed a number of ways that ACL used to cover payments within invoices.

In the year 2009, the SEC announced the filing of settled enforcement action against Wurzel who neither admitted nor denied allegations against him. Wurzel agreed to comply with the orders issued by the SEC, keeping him away from any future violations. He was forced to pay a fine amounting to US $ 35,000. This was termed as a civil penalty. The UIC neither admitted, nor denied these allegations. The Commission ordered the UIC body to keep away from any future violations (Beasley, 2010, para. 4).

According to Apostolon and Crumbles (2008, p.1-2), all companies trading their shares in the capital markets should prepare and present true and fair financial statements. Consequently, the auditors should evaluate these statements along with their corresponding accounts to evaluate whether they represent the true position of the enterprise at the year end.

We will write a custom Assessment on How the Information and System Assurance Theory and Methodology Impacted an Actual Company in the Last 10 Years specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the policies that govern SEC dictates that any corporation that has its shares publicly traded must go through an independent assessment which is conducted by competent audit professionals. The process would involve the inspection of all financial records and other related details. This is aimed at establishing the company’s cash flow which automatically depicts the financial position of the organization.

The GAAOP CPA Journal forms the basis of the operation (2008, para.1). At the end of the inspection, the auditor must comment on the outcomes of the examination. The auditor has the mandate of organizing and conducting the audit work in such a way that the end results reveals whether there are any misrepresentations of financial statements due to fraud or errors.

In addition, Au section 110 (2010, p.6-10) states that the independent auditor also has a responsibility that covers the profession. The American Institute of Certified Public Accounts has rules and standards that stipulate the code of professional ethics. According to AICPA, an auditor must conform to the standards that govern his fellow practitioners.

It is important for auditors and the management to prevent and detect cases of fraud when they arise in the organization. Fraud is a deliberate misrepresentation that causes another person, organization or a group of persons to suffer damages (Pollick, 2010, para. 1), usually monetary losses. The high level of fraud has made many investors to suffer huge losses. The high level of fraud has remained persistent due to the complexity of detecting fraud using the current available technologies.

To avoid such losses, the auditor should include in his report disclaimers warning the investors that the accounts are not prepared in accordance with the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles. Therefore, when the auditor is expressing his/her opinions, he/she should bear take into account the plight of the users of the audited financial statements to avoid instances of a legal suit.

Conclusion-Internal control failures In conclusion, UIC lacked meaningful controls to prevent or detect the ACL president’s authorization of unwarranted payments to the agent. To support the conclusion, the Security and Exchange Commission highlighted a series of UIC’s internal control failures which included:

Front end accounting controls

Back end accounting controls

Due diligence on agents and

Contractual rights.

With regard to the front-end accounting controls, no single person is allowed to authorize transactions or payments without sufficient internal transparency. This is made possible through separation of duties. In this case, SEC alleged that the CIU had permitted the president, Wurzel, to allow huge payments to the EAF Agent without substantiated documents.

In addition, the Security and Exchange Commission was aware of one occasion in which a UIC official did review a payment. There was an unusual US $ 100,000 advance to the Egyptian Air Force Agent. The SEC had also realized that one of the UIC employees approved the payment without inquiring into the purpose or a justification for the payment.

Not sure if you can write a paper on How the Information and System Assurance Theory and Methodology Impacted an Actual Company in the Last 10 Years by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Secondly, there was back end accounting controls. According to Shearman and Sterling (2008, p.2), the Accounting 101 requires that all payments should be supported by proper documents. The substantiated documents should prove that payments are for certifiable goods or services. According to SEC, the ACL is supposed to pay the EAF agent up to U.S. $ 564,000.

This is the estimated amount of money charged for marketing and consulting services. The amounts paid in respect to the services rendered hardly had no meaningful records documenting the services that the Egyptian Air Force Agent had allegedly provided to the CIU.

Moreover, it was clear that the ACL Company had been making transactions with the EAF Agent for up to six months yet there were no written records. Thirdly, there was lack of due diligence on the part of the agents. According to the accounting compliance (Compliance 101), companies are very much obliged to conduct the elements of due diligence to foreign consultants and to agents as well.

With regard to the case study in question, the SEC reveals that there was a UIC’s policy which stipulated that all people who wished to be foreign agents surrender their outstanding diligence forms. In the case of the Egyptian Air Force Agent, ACL first began paying the Egyptian Air Force Agent in the year 1997 without having executed a contract. In March 1998, the Egyptian Air Force agent implemented the contract. However, the agent overlooked any due diligence.

In addition, the CIU Company obtained in the year 1999 a corporate legal approval of the contact. Even then, the CIU did not submit any evidence of having conducted due diligence beforehand. Those who needed the diligence forms in 1992 did not go through an independent judgment because ACL forwarded the forms that the EAF agent had filled. In conclusion, there was an internal control deficit on contractual rights.

The Accounting Compliance 101 dictates that after companies are engaged, it’s upon the companies to examine and supervise what the agents carry out. SAC agents become part of the company. Agency contracts should conduct maximum monitoring as expected. Although the UIC realizes about the case early enough, there was need for the agency contracts to include warranties and certification apart from just the standardized FCPA representations.

The auditors and accounts would also be allowed to access consultant’s books and records. On the other hand, SEC realized that the UIC’S corporate legal agreement would result into various contracts at the start of 1999. This would be permitted by the EAF Agent. However, they avoided to include the FCPA representations and the audit rights until in 2003.

Recommendation-Brainstorming sessions and fraud related inquiries Auditing is a complicated task and if proper care is not taken, many investors will continue to suffer. To avoid this, auditors are required to familiarize themselves with the current treads in audit practice. They should be up to date with the technology prevailing in the market to be in a position to deal with the current situations.

The AU (2010 sec.316 .para.14–17) explores how a well organized and effective audit team should conduct an audit work. One of the key issues in the AU section 316.14 article is the importance of having an audit plan. This goes hand in hand with making a reasonable examination of the probability of misstatements that may arise from fraud. It is important to ensure that team members exchanged ideas.

In other words, there is need for members of the auditing team to take part in brainstorming sessions regarding financial statements that are suspected to have been implicated with fraud. Also, the team should be at a fore front to consider how the management can engage in concealing the fraudulent financial reporting. Therefore, the discussion should be aimed at keeping the audit team awake and aware of how the fraud can be perpetrated and also concealed.

In addition, the importance of audit team members that have a questioning mind is clearly stressed out. The auditors should be aware of the reasons that encourage management to commit fraud. Also, the kind of the fraud to be perpetrated should be revolving in the minds of the auditors.

Further, an audit team needs to be hardworking and keen to details so as to obtain effective and appropriate evidences that would back up their judgments. The key members of the involved audit team must actively contribute in making decisions. This may be seen when the member is involved in brainstorming sessions and while evaluating the contract documents in efforts to check against fraud and misstatements.

The AU section 316.17 contains rules that affect the level of discussions that an audit team holds. It also controls how the discussion is carried out. In cases where more than one location is involved, the section suggests that team members hold various discussions in different locations for effectiveness. A case of this nature may involve a company and its subsidiary.

For an effective audit, it is advisable to be familiar with the planning steps which are very critical for an effective audit. There have been incidents like failure in observing the set standards. For instance, in the case where the PCAOB inspectors identified inspections that were carried out by an audit team who would not demonstrate the brainstorming session.

In the second instance, the PCAOB evaluators came across audits in which the audit teams did the brainstorming session after fieldwork had taken place. In the third case, the auditors identified audits that revealed that some key members were absent during the brainstorming session. Therefore, auditors and the management need to resume their respective duties of preventing and detecting errors once they arise.

Reference List Au section 110, (2010). Responsibility and functions of independent auditor. Web.

Apostolon, N.,


Prenatal and Post Natal Motherhood Report custom essay help

Table of Contents The Report

Statistical Methods

The Process and Significance Tests


The Report The report was based on the study of the impact of depression screening on prenatal and post natal motherhood and effects of early interventions. A rigorous selection criterion was applied in collecting relevant data for analysis to answer key question (KQ) on the impact of early interventions.

The study was assessed against predetermined benchmarks to ensure good quality and reliable results. To attain high quality data, data validation and verification techniques were used in the research. The target population was fairly treated with adequate representation with sensitivity analysis appropriate performance ratings on the test sample.

Statistical Methods The statistical procedures mentioned in the study included data collection techniques, sampling methods, the null and alternative hypotheses, probability distributions, the level and type of test done, and the rejection criteria on the significance of prenatal and post natal interventions (Crawshaw


Employee retention connection model Report essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Literature review

Employee retention connection model

Integrated retention System

Critical appraisal


Reference List

Introduction In the recent past, tremendous changes in the business environment have occasioned employee mobility in an unprecedented manner. This can be attributed to a number of factors. For example, economic globalization has availed limitless and very attractive opportunities for employees with the intention of optimizing their career goals and objectives within the shortest time possible.

In view of the danger of losing their most prized asset (human resource), employers have devised strategies geared towards motivating and encouraging employees to retain their current jobs in the organization. This report provides a literature review on employee retention. In order to achieve this goal, the research paper considers conceptual models and systems under utilization by companies and organizations.

Literature review Considering the massive losses experienced by organizations, Fitz-ens (1997, p. 3) emphasizes the need for organizations to embrace strategies and models that would motivate employees. According to Howart (2010, p. 2), underpayment and strained relationship with the management team coupled with unclear responsibilities and poor working conditions have been cited as some of the factors that make employees to consider leaving their jobs.

To this end, an array of models has been put in practice by many organizations with mixed success rates. Using the Herzberg theory, Quaero Company embarked on improvement of its communication system and the development of flexible work schedules thereby resulting in retention of its talented and experienced employees in the face of increasing competition in the industry (Mitchelman, 2003, para. 15).

Provision of fairness and proper climate, as stipulated in the equity theory, is imperative in ensuring that employees realize their optimal potential as a requirement particularly when applying the Maslow hierarchy concept in the United States (Kreitner


Advantages and Disadvantages of Using Presentation Aids in Group Presentations Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Types of Presentation Aids

General Advantages of Presentation Aids

General Disadvantages of Presentation Aids



Introduction Presentations are an integral part of communicating in a group setting. In making presentations, the use of presentation aids has been seen to contribute to the effectiveness of the presentation process. Owing to their great success in enhancing the presentation efforts, presentation aids have become so prevalent that sometimes they are seen to be synonymous to the very act of making a presentation.

It has been noted that sometimes, the overuse of presentation aids degenerates the quality of the presentations as the aids distract the audience from the speaker and his message. It is therefore important that great care is taken to ensure that the usefulness of presentation aids is exploited fully without having their adverse effects affecting the quality of the presentation.

As such, it is important to identify both the strengths and setbacks that are associated with the various presentation aids that are available. This paper shall set out to demonstrate that presentation aids have their inherent merits and demerits and that over relying on these aids may have a negative impact on the presentation. The paper shall begin by identifying the various presentation aids available and progress to give an in-depth look at the merits and demerits of using presentation aids.

Types of Presentation Aids Presentation aids are defined as “supplementary audio and/or visual materials that help an audience understand and remember the content of a discussion or presentation” (Engleberg


“Araby” by James Joyce Essay college essay help

The story is based on North Richmond Street. This Street is used metaphorically to give readers an overview about the writer’s world. The writer lives with his uncle in the city. The setting of the house in which he lives is an old building which was formally inhabited by a late priest .It is surrounded with newspaper litter. He complains that it was always cold to stay indoors and more often he would join other children outside and play till darkness fell.

Mangan’s sister would come out to call his brother and rays of light from inside the house would light their way. The writer claims that the girl had a good and admirable figure and that even his brother would tease her. Her brown figure had attracted him and he would stare at her as long as she was not watching.

According to the story, it was common for the writer’s aunt to go to the market on Saturday’s and every time he accompanied her. After repeatedly seeing the girl, the writer says that he felt love for her and always wanted to talk to her although it proved difficult for him.

The writer is talking about love and how it springs forth on someone’s heart. The description of the city shows that there was romance all over and even the cold in the city could not hold the love for her back. The writer effectively delivers love message by use of various styles. Firstly, the story is developed in a cold setting. This is drawn from the explanation, “…When the short days of winter came, dusk fell before we had well eaten our dinners.

When we met in the street the houses had grown somber.…..” (Joyce para. 3). He continues to say, “……….Her image accompanied me even in places most hostile to romance…….It was a dark rainy evening and there was no sound in the house. Through one of the broken panes I heard the rain impinge upon the earth, the fine incessant needles of water playing in the sodden beds…… Murmuring: ‘O love! O love!‘ many times” (Joyce para.5-6). This shows his love feelings were flared by the romantic setting in the house.

The writer puts it clear that the noises in the street made him think about his love girl, “…. noises converged in a single sensation of life for me: I imagined that I bore my chalice safely through a throng of foes”. The sky was violet, an indicator of love. According to the author, “the nasal chanting of street-singers, who sang a come-all-you about O’Donovan Rossa, or …..” proved love music upon the writer’s ears (Joyce para.5).

From the above excerpts, it is clear that the message was effectively delivered to the readers. In this story, the writer also engages the reader’s mind by letting them get love meaning in certain incidents. The story ends on a sad note showing that all the writer’s efforts to get his love bird were in vain.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Contrary to this, the writer ought to have had some success or a turning point if all his efforts failed. The writer was also successful in developing the story with suspension to make his readers continue reading to the very end. He keeps to himself the idea of whether he managed convincing or explains his feelings of love to the girl. This is an effective writing style that the writer fully utilizes.

Works Cited Joyce, James. Araby.2010. Web.


Role of modern art museum Essay essay help online: essay help online

Human beings rely so much on the past to solve future and the current life challenges. Thus this mere fact calls for efforts to make the past more meaningful and relevant in the current day to day activities undertaken by mankind.

This has led to acute need of establishing of modern art museums in our society because their collections are usually presented in a very artistic manner which initiates curiosity amongst the audience who come to visit such museums. Consequently the audience becomes aroused and inspired by the works of the museums.

Thus this enhances meaning attachment in the objects of the museums, thus making them relevant to the current generation unlike the other kinds of museums which are too conservative in their collections. The historical management of modern art museums involves the curators who are so rigid in their roles. In the modern art museums the curator shifts his or her duties to an artist and the audience acts in position of the curator.

This makes the curator understand the expectations of their own audience and thus making them to be in a position to make relevant modification in their collection in order to ensure that they are focusing on the needs of their clients. This will at long run ensure quality of visits rather than the quantity of visits in the museums and thus this encourage tourists to visit a particular museum several times.

This is not a common practice with majority of tourists because most of them usually plan to visit specific sites once in their life time. Unless that particular site is extra ordinary impressive to the tourists they cannot come again for a revisit (Hamma 1). In this case we are going to address the various roles played by the modern art museum amongst them being the educative, aesthetic and social roles amongst many others. Finally we will also look at the possible evolution of the modern art museum.

The first and most important role of the modern art museum it the aesthetic function which is commonly associated with beauty. Here the most important point of emphasis is the efforts made by the modern art museum to impress their audience. This is mainly done by ensuring that the collections of object and also their presentations in the modern art museum is quite attractive and relevant to the people who usually come to visit such museums.

The artistic work is usually made in a way that the visitors who may be either domestic or foreign tourists are in a position to have self enjoyment in the modern art museum. This vital objective of ensuring that the tourists get maximum enjoyment in such museums is also facilitated by huge investment in various recreational facilities such as development of restaurants which well equipped with various social amenities to suit the interests of both domestic and foreign tourists.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More If all this facilities are in place the tourists will be encouraged to visit a given modern art museum several times which is not a common practice with most of tourists because tourists usually plan to visit a particular site of a museum not more than one time in their life span (Cobb 1).

In this case the modern art museum usually makes a lot of efforts in diversifying it resources meet the expectations of the visitors and this may also include the in need for having most attractive and unique paintings and also if possible getting the real artists who have performed such works so that they can demonstrate by real example to the tourist if so requested and this will do good to the tourists since they will have a real experience and they may want to come back along with their friends or family members.

Secondly, the other function played by modern art museum and which is of great impact on the academic world is the educative role which is effectively undertaken by modern art museum.

This has made most of modern art museums to carry the name of education centers since most of the local educational authorities have implemented policies in which the modern art museum have established links with various institutions of learning comprising with different groups of learners ranging from pre primary pupils to even college and university students (Richmond 1).

In these forums the teachers in different groups of learning levels can have official booking to take their pupils or students there for interactive learning and such modern art museum will ensure all object and facilities are organized in a way which triggers learning curiosity amongst the specified group of learners.

Here the visitors who are generally termed as tourists will have all the time to ask various questions to the responsible curator and in return receive the most relevant and accurate response accordingly and this will highly be of crucial importance to the learners since it will satisfy their curiosity aroused and enable them come to concrete formation of opinion about various issues either which they may have come across in class work or through general knowledge of life.

This will consequently lead to most relevant conclusions made by learners of various learning groups since these conclusions are derived from personal observations made by the learners and also real experiences of the situation by the learners.

We will write a custom Essay on Role of modern art museum specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Also in the modern art museums the learners can have the young tasks can also have the privilege of coming on one on one interaction with hero artists or their works and this can be of great inspiration to the young people who may wish to grow and be like or even become better than such artists.

Modern art museums also provides the most appropriate and convenient places for learners and most especially learner in higher levels of studies a chance to undertake their research work on various issues which their reference can only be found in such modern art museum.

Thus by the acts of teachers taking their learners to modern art museums they will be acting in accordance with the stipulations of constructivist theory which says that learning is a process which is very active and it demands that one should make meaning out of objects as they are brought to our thinking abilities by our senses.

And this means that the learners can comprehend to great magnitudes what they have experienced other than what only exists in theoretical world and this reduces the abstractness of various concepts and principles learned in class work.

This is very evident in most works of history and also art since their perfect conceptualization is highly correlated to visits made in the modern art museum since the resources in such museum provides firsthand experience to the learner which is very critical towards effective learning (Pfaelzar 1).

Also the experiences obtained from the works of modern art museums can also be incorporated by schools through the relevant authorities in the school curriculum in order to prepare learners to grasp the various opportunities and also prepare the pupils for adult life.

Thirdly, the other most important role played by the modern art museum is the social role. In this case the modern art museum acts as social institution whereby a lot of community undertakings are carried out which are quite relevant to the given society.

The modern art museum preserves the cultural heritages of particular community and thus all positive cultural values can be passed from one generation to the other by virtue of the existence of modern art museum otherwise such beautiful cultural values and practices will be eroded with time if not conserved in the modern art museum which does so in ways which are quite meaningful and relevant to the contemporary generation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Role of modern art museum by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Also the modern art museum can be used as a platform for creation of awareness to a given society about the different cultures in other societies thus making them informed and thus sensitive when presenting some objects which may be culturally sacred in other societies.

In the modern art museum the members of a given society can learn about the endangered species of flora and fauna and thus take the necessary measurements in order to preserve the endangered species for sustainable co-existence. The modern art museum can be used to initiate dialogue aimed at facilitating realization of a particular change.

For example modern art museum played a very critical role in addressing the issue of racism because they created platforms whereby people could talk freely about racism in United States of America and this went ahead and captured the attention of the media (Hamma 1). From the above we can say that the modern art museum acts as memory banks for all events and objects in the society which is of great utility to the members of a given social group.

The evolution of the modern art museum could have been as a result of the realization of acute need to preserve some endangered species of fauna or flora and most specifically the need to change the way other museums used to present their objects to their audience in order to be relevant and meaningful to the modern generation and also add the taste of beauty and entertainment in the museum and thus development of modern art museum.

The preservation of various artistic objects in a modern art museum will at least give an opportunity to the existing and also the generation to come to have an experience of seeing such species of fauna or flora.

The museums can also result from some historical sites or events or objects which needs to be preserved and also from some very rare objects which might be quite valuable such gold which is a very precious stone (Cobb 1). All these objects are installed in the most artistic way in modern art museums which also contains the paintings of most famous artists and thus the need to preserve them being quite enormous.

It is very clear from the above discussion that the modern art museum plays a very vital role in the lives of mankind. This is because people can always refer to their past in order to face the present and the future in the most meaningful and relevant manner. Also the modern art museums are a great source of recreation to humanity at large. Here we have talked about the roles of modern art museums which have included educative, social and aesthetic roles. We have also looked at the possible evolution of modern art museums.

Works Cited Cobb, Matthew. “Why evolution is true”. 2010. Web.

Hamma, Kenneth. “The role of museums in online teaching, learning, and research.” 2004. Web.

Pfaelzar, Morgan. “The role of the art museum”. 2010. Web.

Richmond, Philips. “How you can get evolution back into zoos and museums.” 2008. Web.


The Fortune 100-Best companies list and its significance to our employment agency Report essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Abstract


Importance of establishing a working relationship

Employment opportunities at Fortune 100-Best companies

Establishing an exclusive relationship

Reference List

Abstract At present, placement agencies play a critical role in assisting those seeking for employment opportunities either for the first time or for those who want to advance their career. The Fortune 100 Best Companies to Work For list came out at the beginning of the year. It is important for our placement firm to establish a good working relationship with these companies so that we can succeed in business. Most of these companies have announced several positions that need to be filled in the near future. These companies are particularly good places where the graduates from Saint Leo University can seek for employment opportunities.

More so, our employment agency can greatly benefit if it can establish an exclusive relationship with some of them, such as SAS, Edward Jones, and Google. This is because these companies have maintained an organizational culture that ensures that the employees are satisfied at their place of work. In these companies, employees are treated with all the respect they deserve without humiliating them unnecessarily.

Introduction Currently, employment agencies play a crucial role in assisting those seeking for employment opportunities for the first time or those who want to advance their career. Employment or placement agencies are corporations that find jobs for individuals or individuals for jobs by providing an orientation of finding the jobs and creating a pool of screened candidates.

They achieve this through constant advertising and referrals from satisfied candidates and potential employers. In most cases, the person looking for employment pays the placement fees.

However, in other instances, the employer caters for the expenses based on the acceptance of the job seeker. The employment agencies serve various clients, ranging from first-time job seekers to those in the executive level. Generally, the agencies would screen out for the best candidates to fill the vacant positions, whereas the employer makes the final decision on which candidates to recruit.

The FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For List came out this year in mid-January. It is interesting that most of these companies have numerous job openings and are looking forward to hire more employees soon. Nearly all firms strive to be named in the FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For list.

This is because when they have job openings, they receive twice as many applications as firms that are not found on the list. In addition, they enjoy remarkable employee turnover levels which are less than half those of their main competitors in the market. In short, satisfied employees fuel corporate profits as individuals love to work in places where they are treated well.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In a study, researchers compared the organizational performance of Fortune’s 100-Best list with two sets of other corporations, a matched group and the broad market of publicly traded firms over a six-year period (Cascio


Employment Relations Issues: Discrimination in New Zealand’s Work Place Research Paper argumentative essay help

Introduction Over the past few centuries, the human civilization has advanced tremendously giving rise to significant social and economic changes. This has resulted most notably in the creation of a large group of working class members of the society and their employers.

It is this class that has been primarily responsible for the creation of immense wealth and therefore the growth of the nations. In the earlier years of industrialization, work conditions were appalling with low wages and discriminatory practices being rampant leading to poor work relations.

However, this has changed with recent times and in the European region, employers have embraced good practices that among other things are aimed at combating race and ethnic discrimination. In addition to this most countries, New Zealand included, have endorsed the Equal Employment Opportunities (EEOs) which are policies that are intended to “eliminate workplace discrimination on the basis of age, colour, disability, race, religion or sex” (The National Equal Opportunities Network, 2010).

In spite of these efforts, there are still incidents of discrimination in the New Zealand workplace which continue to undermine EEO policies and in some cases result in decreased productivity among workers. This paper shall set out to investigate the various types of discriminatory practices that continue to deter favourable employment relationships in the New Zealand employment field.

This paper will begin by presenting a review of literature on the topic of employee discrimination and various government legislations that have been introduced to combat it. The paper will then delve into a detailed discussing of significant discrimination practices in New Zealand and highlight how they have negatively impacted on New Zealand’s labour industry.

A Review of Literature The United Nations convections define discrimination as “any distinction, exclusion, restriction or preference based on race, colour, descent, or national or ethnic origin” (UNHCHR, 2010). In the work environment, discrimination results in an individual worker or a group of workers being singled out for their race, color, creed or age and treated unfairly. This may negatively impact on their work performance. Discrimination may be categorized as direct and indirect discrimination.

Direct Discrimination is the more obvious form of this practice and it occurs when a person is explicitly treated less favourably than another person has or would be treated in a similar situation (Craig, 2006, p.30). Indirect discrimination is the less visible form of this ill and it is defined as occurring where “an apparently neutral provision, criterion or practice would put persons characterized by a protected ground at a particular disadvantage compared with other persons” (Craig, 2006, p.30).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The most common form of indirect discrimination is that of language requirements that are imposed by governments and private employers leading to unfair restrictions on some people.

While such requirements may be necessary in some industries, Willmore (2001) notes that these requirements sometimes serve as discriminatory measures against certain ethnic groups for example when a particular job does not require fluency in any language. Laws that demand that employees work on a given day of the week may also discriminate against groups whose religion dictates that they set aside particular days for worship.

Discrimination of any kind (be it direct or indirect) is seen as an infringement on the basic human rights and fundamental freedoms afforded to all human beings and governments all over the world have undertaken measures to stop this practice by being signatories to UN conventions that decry these practices (UNHCHR, 2010). The government of New Zealand has through the years come up with various policies and Acts to ensure that workers are protected from various forms of discrimination or unfair treatment.

One of the legislatures by New Zealand is The Equal Pay Act 1972 which ensures that persons of similar qualifications employed in similar circumstances of work shall be afforded the same terms of employment, conditions of work and fringe benefits regardless of their sex (New Zealand Legislation, 2008).

With this legislation, New Zealand addressed the issue of unequal pay which had been predominant with women being paid less than their male counterparts for the same kind of work. With the enactment of this policy in New Zealand, both sexes were guaranteed similar pay therefore bringing about legally enforceable equality.

Labour market conditions have since then continued to be generally favourable for female workers leading to an increase in women’s presence in the labour market. A study by Dixon (2000) demonstrates that the differences between male and female employees in average levels of educational attainment reduced over the 1980s and 1990s and the gender gap in earnings narrowed substantially especially among the low income earners.

Another significant act that ensured the rights of employees were respected was the Employment Contracts Act of 1991 which brought about significant changes in New Zealand’s industrial relations structure by stipulating a set of minimum rights which had to be encapsulated in any individual’s contract (International Labour Office, 2004).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Employment Relations Issues: Discrimination in New Zealand’s Work Place specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In cases were an employee wished to take the court to settle some grievances, the Employment Contracts Act 1991 ensured that legal aid was provided by the government. However, this Act led to an increase in the amount of individual litigations against employers therefore leading to the need to amend the law. Amends were in the form of the Employment Relations Act 2000 which sought to reduce the excessive legalism that the Employment Contracts Act of 1991 had caused (ILO, 2004).

The Employment Relations Act 2000 laid greater emphasis on legal action instead favouring mediation as the first stem in dispute resolution therefore leading to a decrease in legal aid availability to employees. The common underpinning of these legislations was to obligate both the employer and the employee to deal with each other in good faith. This is from the basic understanding that a productive relationship can only arise when both parties feel that they are being treated in a just and fair manner.

In addition to these laws, there was a realization in New Zealand that work life had an impact on the social and family life of the worker. Adema and Whiteford (2007) assert that New Zealand has some of the longest working hours in the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development countries.

Due to research which indicated that work life can have a negative impact on the quality of family life for the workers; New Zealand enacted the Employment Relations Amendment Act 2007 (Department of Labour, 2008). This was in a bid to improve the work experience of employees by ensuring that they had a genuine choice about the way they worked therefore leading to higher productivity in the work place.

To record the progress of such policies, the New Zealand department of labour undertakes regular surveys to underscore the significance of such programs. The 2008 survey found that 50% of businesses advised their employees on the different flexible work options available to them therefore leading to a more conducive work environment for the workers (Department of Labour, 2008).

Discrimination in the New Zealand Work Place Although there have been a rapid improvement in employment relationships as a result of various legislations in New Zealand, there are still issues which hamper these relationships therefore leading to dissatisfaction and hence lower productivity. While most forms of discrimination in New Zealand have over time been all but wiped out there has been a reemergence of some forms of discrimination in the workplace.

McGregor and Gray (2002) suggest that certain socio-economic factors can be held to blame for the greater prevalence of some of these discriminations since in current times, unemployment rates are rising in the country as a result of harsh economic realities. However, discrimination is counterproductive and a violation of human rights which New Zealand is committed to uphold. Some of the prevalent discrimination grounds in New Zealand’s work place are as follows.

Discrimination on the Basis of Age

Discrimination against older people in the workplace is not a new phenomenon in New Zealand and as early as the early 1990s, the government saw need to put measures to contain its prevalence (McGregor and Gray, 2002). The Human rights Act 1993 in particular made a special provision which prohibited discrimination on the basis of age by abolishing the compulsory retirement on the grounds of age and raising the traditional “exit” age from work to 65 which was 5 years greater than the previous limit.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Employment Relations Issues: Discrimination in New Zealand’s Work Place by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More McGregor and Gray (2002) note that persistent stereotypes are hugely responsible for this discrimination which arises from social prejudices against older people in general. A study by McGregor


China’s Investment Environment Report custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Brief overview of China’s investment climate

Analysis of China’s investment climate



Introduction Over the past century, the human race has dedicated a vast proportion of the available resources to the efforts of self-actualization in terms of development politically, socially, economically and technologically. To provide a means for measuring the progress made, means have been developed through which progress in these sectors can be analyzed and monitored all the while checking on the possible ramifications that can arise from any selected course of action.

This paper shall focus on the environmental aspect of economic development. It shall dwell on the various factors used to monitor and analyze economy growth in various economies. Much of the discussion shall concentrate on Chinas investment climate to evaluate whether it offers a feasible ground for foreign investments.

However, it is a known fact that FDI’s have resulted in positive results as is illustrated by Jiang (2005) who asserts that the social welfare of the host country is much improved. This is mostly because of the technological transfer that the local suppliers gain is adopted which in turn improves productivity and quality all the while increasing the GDP of the host country and their ability to compete in the global scene.

Brief overview of China’s investment climate According to the World Bank (2002), the Chinese economic progress over the years has been remarkable with the country experiencing increased manufacturing and service industry potentials. This has been because of rapid technological advancement brought in by FDI’s, and the increase use of labor-intensive techniques of production.

Analysis of China’s investment climate Investment climate as defined by Eng (2005) refers to the quality and quantity of investment flowing into a given area. It depends on the expected returns that an investor hopes to get and the uncertainties that surround these returns. To ensure that an investment yield the expected results, a cost benefit analysis (CBA) and a SWOT analysis may come in handy. To effectively carryout these analyses, there are components that need to be assessed as pertaining to the economic environment of the host nation (Eng, 2005).

First, an investor has to evaluate the macro/ country level aspects that may affect the economic well being of the nation as regarding to foreign investments. These include level of political stability, national policies on trade and foreign investment, entry and exit barriers, labor market flexibility and the availability of financial services (Liaw, 2007). These factors determine the efficacy of the regulatory framework that the host nation has adopted in regards to foreign investments and at the same time act as incentives to potential investors.

Secondly and no less important is the physical and financial infrastructure that a host nation has to offer. These include but are not limited to, roads, power, adequate communication networks, banking and finance, mobility and availability of skilled personnel and the endowment of technological skills (Hsu


Comparison between the serpent in the Old Testament and the one in Gilgamesh Essay online essay help

From the Old Testament book of Genesis, the serpent is a representation of the devil. God had strictly warned Adam and Eve not to eat from a particular tree in the Garden of Eden but Satan, in his crafty ways, managed to convince them to partake of its fruit promising it would give them unending wisdom. When God finds out what the two have done, He declares that from then henceforth human beings shall grow old and die while the snake would be subjected to physical violence from humans.

In the epic of Gilgamesh, the quest for eternal life by the lead character takes him to the particular flower that could accord him this wish (Shin-eqi-unninni 30-35). The serpent however causes him to let go of it. The serpent is responsible for Gilgamesh not getting everlasting life in the same way that the serpent in the Bible led Adam and Eve to lose a chance at eternal life.

In both stories, the serpent uses well thought out trickery to accomplish his mission. In the Bible story, the snake isolates Eve and then gets her to believe that God had a hidden motive not to let them eat the fruit from the particular tree. The temptation to go against God’s commands proves too strong and finally Eve gives in and finding out the goodness of the fruit manages to convince Adam to have a taste as well.

In the Gilgamesh story, the serpent tracks Gilgamesh’s movements all the way to the flower of immortality wish (Shin-eqi-unninni 30-31). While Gilgamesh stops to rest and have a bath, the serpent snatches the flower of eternal life from him consequently taking away immortality from mankind.

In the Bible creation story, he serpent chooses Eve’s time of weakness (when Adam is not present) to corrupt her brain with physical desires. In the Epic of Gilgamesh, the serpent strikes at him (Gilgamesh) in his time of weakness- that is, whilst he is taking a bath. This similarly illustrates that the serpent knows that he is no match for the human when he (the human) is well aware of its strength and therefore preys on him during his weakest.

In both the Gilgamesh and the Old Testament story, the serpent is used as a representation of Satan. The crafty ways that Satan uses to get people to do things his way, is well manifested in the way that the serpent carries itself.

In both myths as well, the serpent has been given some human characteristics, in the sense that it can communicate to its victims by speech. Though in reality it is impossible for a snake to talk or even have such desires as eternal life, the humanization from both stories of this particular reptile is strikingly similar.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The main difference between the serpent incidents in the Bible story and the Epic of Gilgamesh is the fact that in the latter, the serpent snatched eternal life for itself.

This is as opposed to the creation story whereby Adam and Eve already had been accorded eternal life by God and only lost it as a punishment for their disobedience. Secondly, the repercussions are not clear on the part of the serpent in the second story. To some extent he actually gets rewarded with eternal life as opposed to the Bible story where he is cursed to walk on his belly.

Works Cited Shin-eqi-unninni. “Gilgamesh”. The Norton Anthology of World Literature, Vol. A: Beginnings to A.D. 100, 2nd Edition. Ed. Sarah Lawall et al. New York: W.W. Norton


China’s Investment Environment Report college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Brief overview of China’s investment climate

Analysis of China’s investment climate



Introduction Over the past century, the human race has dedicated a vast proportion of the available resources to the efforts of self-actualization in terms of development politically, socially, economically and technologically. To provide a means for measuring the progress made, means have been developed through which progress in these sectors can be analyzed and monitored all the while checking on the possible ramifications that can arise from any selected course of action.

This paper shall focus on the environmental aspect of economic development. It shall dwell on the various factors used to monitor and analyze economy growth in various economies. Much of the discussion shall concentrate on Chinas investment climate to evaluate whether it offers a feasible ground for foreign investments.

However, it is a known fact that FDI’s have resulted in positive results as is illustrated by Jiang (2005) who asserts that the social welfare of the host country is much improved. This is mostly because of the technological transfer that the local suppliers gain is adopted which in turn improves productivity and quality all the while increasing the GDP of the host country and their ability to compete in the global scene.

Brief overview of China’s investment climate According to the World Bank (2002), the Chinese economic progress over the years has been remarkable with the country experiencing increased manufacturing and service industry potentials. This has been because of rapid technological advancement brought in by FDI’s, and the increase use of labor-intensive techniques of production.

Analysis of China’s investment climate Investment climate as defined by Eng (2005) refers to the quality and quantity of investment flowing into a given area. It depends on the expected returns that an investor hopes to get and the uncertainties that surround these returns. To ensure that an investment yield the expected results, a cost benefit analysis (CBA) and a SWOT analysis may come in handy. To effectively carryout these analyses, there are components that need to be assessed as pertaining to the economic environment of the host nation (Eng, 2005).

First, an investor has to evaluate the macro/ country level aspects that may affect the economic well being of the nation as regarding to foreign investments. These include level of political stability, national policies on trade and foreign investment, entry and exit barriers, labor market flexibility and the availability of financial services (Liaw, 2007). These factors determine the efficacy of the regulatory framework that the host nation has adopted in regards to foreign investments and at the same time act as incentives to potential investors.

Secondly and no less important is the physical and financial infrastructure that a host nation has to offer. These include but are not limited to, roads, power, adequate communication networks, banking and finance, mobility and availability of skilled personnel and the endowment of technological skills (Hsu


Comparison between the serpent in the Old Testament and the one in Gilgamesh Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

From the Old Testament book of Genesis, the serpent is a representation of the devil. God had strictly warned Adam and Eve not to eat from a particular tree in the Garden of Eden but Satan, in his crafty ways, managed to convince them to partake of its fruit promising it would give them unending wisdom. When God finds out what the two have done, He declares that from then henceforth human beings shall grow old and die while the snake would be subjected to physical violence from humans.

In the epic of Gilgamesh, the quest for eternal life by the lead character takes him to the particular flower that could accord him this wish (Shin-eqi-unninni 30-35). The serpent however causes him to let go of it. The serpent is responsible for Gilgamesh not getting everlasting life in the same way that the serpent in the Bible led Adam and Eve to lose a chance at eternal life.

In both stories, the serpent uses well thought out trickery to accomplish his mission. In the Bible story, the snake isolates Eve and then gets her to believe that God had a hidden motive not to let them eat the fruit from the particular tree. The temptation to go against God’s commands proves too strong and finally Eve gives in and finding out the goodness of the fruit manages to convince Adam to have a taste as well.

In the Gilgamesh story, the serpent tracks Gilgamesh’s movements all the way to the flower of immortality wish (Shin-eqi-unninni 30-31). While Gilgamesh stops to rest and have a bath, the serpent snatches the flower of eternal life from him consequently taking away immortality from mankind.

In the Bible creation story, he serpent chooses Eve’s time of weakness (when Adam is not present) to corrupt her brain with physical desires. In the Epic of Gilgamesh, the serpent strikes at him (Gilgamesh) in his time of weakness- that is, whilst he is taking a bath. This similarly illustrates that the serpent knows that he is no match for the human when he (the human) is well aware of its strength and therefore preys on him during his weakest.

In both the Gilgamesh and the Old Testament story, the serpent is used as a representation of Satan. The crafty ways that Satan uses to get people to do things his way, is well manifested in the way that the serpent carries itself.

In both myths as well, the serpent has been given some human characteristics, in the sense that it can communicate to its victims by speech. Though in reality it is impossible for a snake to talk or even have such desires as eternal life, the humanization from both stories of this particular reptile is strikingly similar.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The main difference between the serpent incidents in the Bible story and the Epic of Gilgamesh is the fact that in the latter, the serpent snatched eternal life for itself.

This is as opposed to the creation story whereby Adam and Eve already had been accorded eternal life by God and only lost it as a punishment for their disobedience. Secondly, the repercussions are not clear on the part of the serpent in the second story. To some extent he actually gets rewarded with eternal life as opposed to the Bible story where he is cursed to walk on his belly.

Works Cited Shin-eqi-unninni. “Gilgamesh”. The Norton Anthology of World Literature, Vol. A: Beginnings to A.D. 100, 2nd Edition. Ed. Sarah Lawall et al. New York: W.W. Norton


Business Report: Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Inc Report best essay help

Executive Summary Dell Company is an international enterprise dealing with computers and its accessories. It is based in Round Rock, USA and employs over 96,000 employees in its worldwide branches. The name Dell was derived from its founder Michael Dell.

Growth of Dell Company is attributed to mergers and acquisitions including the take over of Alienware in 2006 and Perot Systems in 2009. Some of the products manufactured and sold by dell include: Personal computers, servers, softwares among other IT products. Marketing of these products depends entirely on the description of the market segment.

Manufacturing criteria of Dell also considers proximity to its customers such that just-in-time approach is of essence. In 2004, Dell Company limited took up an initiative to recycle products which lead to its subsequent award for promoting responsibility on the part of the producer.

Notwithstanding, the technical support offered to customers, Dell company utilizes extensive marketing strategy with an aim of reaching many customers. Use of advertisement and dell kiosks has increased product penetration in the market. Dell kiosks were oriented to give personalized service to customers i.e. by way of shopping, or telephone services.

ASUSTeK Computer Inc. participates in manufacturing and sale of ICT equipment and software programs. Some of its major products comprise of: laptops, personal computers, broadband products, mobile phones and computer accessories. Its location is in Taiwan.

Introduction This paper presents a marketing report of two internationally based companies namely: Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Inc. Dell are based in Round Rock USA while ASUSTeK is located in Taiwan. The ASUS manufacture ICT equipments to be sold in international as well as local market whilst Dell assembles components. It is important to investigate whether the company’s management participates in strategic marketing and planning.

If so, then we shall explore the strategic Hierarchy of the business investment. Firms thrive under certain micro and macro environment. 2008 recession is one of the macro environments which affected negatively the productivity of both companies whilst the micro environment mainly captures marketing criteria used to outwit its competitors i.e. Apple. These environments will be investigated in-depth by this business report.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Inc have registered a substantial level of success from its business dealings due to maximization of efficient marketing strategies. The strategies which will be analyzed in the report comprise of: segmentation, target markets, positioning strategy, and ultimately SWOT analysis. Before concluding the paper, recommendation to the respective industries will be outlined.

Industry Background Nearly all sectors in an economy depend entirely on information communication technology. ICT industry is therefore the backbone of both manufacturing and service sectors. This industry has registered a fast pace of progress in terms of technology. In the past, desktop computers with low speed were utilized.

This is not true in the recent times since Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Inc have managed to supply in the market mini computers with high level of speed. Dell’s brands such as Vostro, OptiPlex have the features of reliability, long life, and serviceability (Koehn, 2001). ASUSTeK Computer Inc is also manufacturing pocket PCs, broad bands, and graphics cards with a target of meeting individualized needs of their customers. This is a clear indication that ICT industry is dynamic in nature.

Apple industry which is a major competitor released iPad tablet computer which was quickly embraced by the business world. Use of ipad in Japan had a great impact in the business world simply because of its resolutions and advanced features. Another factor contributing to the success of iPad is the use of stylish, supreme marketing and excellent branding of the products.

From this brief analysis, we can conclude that, ICT industry emphasizes on introducing sophisticated product into the market in order to capture the attention of the target group and out-beat competitors. It must always be the objective of the company to satisfy the needs of the customers by producing quality goods and services.

Company background In 1984, Michael Dell formed PCs limited to sell IBM PC-compatible computers from components of stock. These computers were sold directly to customers.

The aim of PCs limited was to understand the needs of the customers so as to be able to supply customers on a direct basis. Due to the success of the business, Michael dell dropped out of school to channel more energy on the new business. This was after he received a support of 300,000 Dollars from his immediate family. In 1985, Dell Company managed to market ‘Turbo PC’ on its own.

We will write a custom Report on Business Report: Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Inc specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This computer was sold for 95 US Dollars. At that time PCs limited utilized the national computer magazines as the advertisement channel. Orders placed by the customers were organized in such a manner that it fell on a selection criteria. In its first year of trading, the company recorded gross earnings of 73milion dollars. In the year 1985, the company assumed another name, ‘Dell computer Corporation’ and began its international business expansion by entering Ireland.

In 1996, Dell started selling computers through its website and in 2002 its line of business stretched to include television and other computer accessories. This necessitated rebranding of the company name as ‘Dell Inc’. CEO Kevin Rollins took over from Michael Dell in 2004 and served till 2007.

During this time, Dell acquired Alienware as a subsidiary company which introduced AMD microprocessors. Due to its dismal performance, Michael Dell took over as CEO again and in 2008 and acquired EqualLogistic with an objective of gaining a grip in iSCSI Storage Company.

Acquisition of this company reduced manufacturing costs to its lowest level. Dell announced in 2009 a motive of purchasing Perot Systems to become a subsidiary company. Perot Systems specialized in strategic consulting, development of application and system integration (Koehn, 2001). It also dealt with outsourcing in addition to running call centers and handling claims.

ASUSTeK Computer Inc deals with computers and its application in information communication. Its products consist of consumer electronics such as desktop personal computers and other hardware devices. Some of the subsidiary organizations are: AMA Corporation, ASUS computer international, ASUSTeK holdings and other several well developed companies.

ASUS and Germin have engaged themselves in developing mobile phones located in some specific places. The product developed will be called Garmin-Asus nuvifone series. Furthermore, the company entered into partnership with DeviceVM LTD to integrate new technology of Splashtop which allows a user to boot computers and access internet within the shortest time possible.

There is also a possibility of forming a joint venture with Giga Byte technology Co. This means that Giga Bytes would transfer its assets and operation into the joint venture. Partnership between ASUS and a Chinese company, Huan Hsin Holdings, Ltd, would lead to manufacture of notebook casings. Another form of joint venture was with Disney Consumer Product inclined to development of Disney Netbook which is very efficient to use.

Strategic marketing and planning Strategic marketing and planning describes how a business conducts its activities with an objective of realizing maximum returns from investment (Baker, 2008).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Business Report: Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Inc by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It captures overall activity of the business starting with production, establishment of market segments, interests of the customers, financial base of the business and the human resources. For a business venture to meet its wide goals and specific objectives, the management is under strict obligation to shape the company’s products in a manner that will lead to realization of market needs. Strategic planning therefore relates to the overall direction of the business.

Top management of a business venture ought to conduct a comprehensive review of the market and its opportunities continuously which enable them make a long term strategic arrangement. Strategic marketing plan integrates both the goals of a business with the needs of the customer.

In order to realize strategic marketing plan, planners need to segment the market with reference to such factors as Geography, Demography, Psychographic and behavioral factors (Baker, 2008). This stage is preceded by profiling the market segments while taking note of income potential, market share potential, and productivity potentials. Finally, a market segment marketing strategy is developed. This will require a choice between a market leader or product line, mass marketing or target marketing, direct or indirect sales.

Strategy used by Dell has its basis on the following key elements: direct sales, market segmentation, sharing of data and information with supplies, customer care services and bunch customization. It is the hope of the company that the strategy will lead to realization of Dell’s goal of becoming ‘virtually integrated’ business (Koehn, 2001).

This means that the customers, suppliers and the business are pooled together such that activities are conducted in real time basis. The aspect of selling directly to customers enables Dell to gain knowledge of customer’s preference and needs. Feedback after a direct sale acts a source of information about design problems consequently leading to improvement of company’s products.

ASUSTeK Computer Company participates in improving its products so as to meet individualized needs of the customers. This is evident with advent of new multimedia notebook and other products. Infiltration into foreign markets like China in addition to joint ventures with international business is a move towards realization of goals through strategic marketing and planning. As stated earlier, ASUS entered into joint with several businesses including Huan Hsin Holdings and Giga Bytes Company limited.

Macro-environmental forces These forces have its sources from outside the company. They comprise of factors that affect the running of an organization but cannot be controlled directly (Pride, 2009). The recent globalization is one of the macro-environmental forces affecting the running of business investment.

Globalization means that competition is stiff as more differentiated products enter the market. A company must make use of innovative marketing techniques in order to move with social, technological, political and economic changes. Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Company have a technical team mandated to research on the possibilities of introducing new products to match market requirements. Invention of multimedia devices and programs is actually a move towards countering macro-environmental forces.

Micro-environmental forces

These are factors which influence directly company’s strategies and they include: customers, employees, suppliers, shareholders, competitors and other internal factors (Pride, 2009). A firm can use these elements to formulate a workable marketing strategy after sourcing sufficient market information.

Marketing mix can be used by a firm to arrive at the best combination which will ensure that the customers are satisfied. In terms of positioning its sophisticated products, Dell utilizes numerous distribution channels available worldwide. Advertisement through print and visual media is part of the promotional strategy employed by Dell. The slogan ‘ Yours is here’ which was formulated in 2007 aimed at creating awareness that Dell manufactures and sell customized computers thus satisfying individual needs.

Dell kiosks available in many parts of United States are places where customers get a glimpse of various computer products and they can subsequently place an order. Joint venture entered between ASUS and DeviceVM LTD was aimed at capitalizing on new technology of Splashtop which allows a user to boot computers and access internet within the shortest time possible. This is a clear distinction of micro-environment formulated by ASUS to remain competitive.

SWOT analysis This is the analysis of individual competencies by measuring, strengths, weakness, opportunities and threats (Kotler, 2009). It is the responsibility of the management to maximize on the strengths, reduce weakness, make advantage of the opportunities that comes along, and counter the impediments of threats.


During their financial year ended July 2005, Dell registered more than 1 Billion Dollar profits translating to 28% growth. This growth is purely a result of its renowned brands. Direct sales to customers, use of information communication technology and maximum use of customer relation management assist Dell to capture on trustworthy customers. Another specific strength for the company is relatively cheap and readily available labor.

ASUS’S strong financial base is derived from manufacture and sale of computer related components and equipments. During the financial year ended 2009, its revenues amounted to TWD 667.7million. The strength of the company also lies on the many subsidiaries located across the globe. This company attracts many customers due to its standardized products which meets immediate needs of the customers.


Existence of large product and component supply can cause failure in operation of Dell business investment. In the year 2004, several computers were recalled due to the likelihood that they could explode or cause some technical problems. Inability to change suppliers reduces the choices available to the company.

Usually Dell contracts with specific few suppliers which then increase the risk in case supplier defaults to supply or delivers substandard components. ASUS faces a weakness of penetrating markets where Dell has established itself. This is contributed by the fact that Dell has strong market defense mechanisms.


A change made in the position of a chief executive was an opportunity for the company to make more profits. Although Kevin Rollins came in as CEO, Michael Dell remained the chair person in the organization. Another opportunity for dell is the introduction of new products in the market as a diversification strategy.

Television set, printers and phone accessories are different categories of products at the exposure of Dell. Selling low price and rebranded PCs in US market is a move towards formulating new market segments. ASUS has an opportunity to enter rich nations located in the Middle East. This will lead to more revenue generation.


Competition is one of the biggest challenges facing dell in the global market. Apple and other new entrants contribute to stiff competition in the market. Even though Dell ventured into low cost markets i.e. Middle East, competitors still infiltrate such market segments. Fluctuation in the world currencies is another milestone pulling down the prospects of Dell. Recent recession saw frequent changes in the exchange rates. This is not a conducive environment for business as well for ASUS which depends on the global market.

Market segmentation

To ensure that all categories of customers were attended to, Dell made its market more homogeneous (Rainer, 2009). In the year 1998, most of the products were sold to businesses or government associations. Major part of the customers comprised of corporate sector that purchased approximately 1 million PCs annually.

This corporate lot bought PCs at the highest price level in the industry thus contributing to supernormal profits. Example of these corporate sectors include: Ford Motors, Toyota, Shell oil and Michelin. Sales to individuals and small businesses were conducted by phone or internet.

Dell customers utilized toll free line where they could call, place an order or get information about a product through fax. Payment was also effected through credit card.

In the international arena, call center with tall free lines were based in Europe and Asia. These centers were very efficient such that calls were rerouted to specific countries where customers could be attended effectively. An example is a call from Kenya which is rerouted automatically to US for an English speaking sales representative. Dell also conducts its sale activity via internet.

ASUS Computer Company managed to sell its products to different customers after deriving different market segments. This company serves both individual and corporate sectors with a bigger proportion of sales contributed by firms. Pricing strategy helps to differentiate the markets for ASUS products.

Normally, corporate sector purchase product at a higher price level compared to small scale retailers and direct consumers. Supply of new netbook is part of the segmentation strategy where individuals are differentiated from the business world. Netbook was a very effective invention for the business fraternity since fast internet access enabled spontaneous placing of orders.

Target markets

Both print and visual media has been used by Dell to reach specific class of customers. Graphics used in advertisement takes into consideration the audience. To capture the attention of college students, Dell gives detailed specifications about the product which in real sense meets the needs of the student i.e. high internet interactivity. Online marketing by targeting specific corporate world and monitoring the results of an advertisement is an inclination towards reaching variety of market segments.

ASUS Computer Company is considering setting up markets in the sub-Saharan countries to capture the fast pace of socio-economic changes. Products manufactured by ASUS regard highly both younger and older population. PCs meant for the older class are simplified to ease its usage. The company also identifies the nature of young college students who value games and high mobility thus manufactures PCs and laptops to satisfy their needs.

Positioning strategy

This strategy allows a company to avail its products to a place where there is a proximity to customers (Dann, 2004). Advertisement, packaging, and distribution are critical factors to attain wider market coverage. Dell opened up Dell kiosks where customers could catch a view of various products before placing an order.

This is a good description of positioning strategy. Sales agents in various countries play the role of availing dell’s products to its customers. Display of beautiful models is a marketing approach utilized by ASUSTeK Computer Company.

Recommendations Whilst e-commerce is the present approach to trade, Dell must consider advertising its products in an innovative manner. It is prudent to review marketing strategies in a continuous basis so as grasp socio-political and economic changes. Due to globalization effects, Dell and ASUS should establish more customer experience centers in African countries which are still in the verge of achieving its development goals.

Conclusion Dell and ASUSTeK Computer Company are among the leading dealers in computers and its accessories. The success of these two organizations is credited to strategic marketing and planning initiated by the management. This is evident from analysis of segmentation, target markets, positioning strategy, and SWOT analysis of Dell and ASUSTek organizations. A recommendation made is for the companies to infiltrate African countries apart from Europe and Asia. This will expand market share of both organization.

References Baker, M. (2008).The Strategic Marketing Plan Audit. Cambridge: Cambridge Strategy Publications

Dann, S.,


Beauty and the Beast Essay essay help: essay help

Beauty and the Beast (La Belle et la Bête in French) written by Madame Leprince Beaumont in 1776, is renowned for its reformist and moralistic character, especially for discoursing feminine ideals. The story was written with the aim of educating young ladies of the virtues of femininity (Zipes 31).

Beaumont wrote the tale in her magazine as an educational and moralistic story for she strongly believed in reforming the women readers. She wrote her stories in order to reform women within the Christian domain (Walker 61). The discourse of a good woman in her stories was apparent, and the one under study is no exception.

However, these feminine qualities portrayed by Beaumont surpassed the traditional constructs of feminine virtues. The feminine characters that Beaumont stressed on were far greater than just being a kind and self-sacrificing woman. This forward-looking feminine view is apparent in her story Beauty and the Beast. Though she retained many of the traditional feminine virtues of the eighteenth century, she challenged many others that subjugated women.

It has been stated that Beaumont supported female education, and stressed women’s superiority over men (Walker 61). Her stories opine her views on femininity and female superiority. The idealistic world of female superiority painted by Beaumont in her stories was mostly domestic and had a deep sense of religiosity in it. She herself stated that she used her novels as a device to “instill virtue” among “young readers” (Walker 61).

In Beauty and the Beast Beaumont portrays the female with feminine virtue becomes the real hero and saves a man doomed for his ignorant arrogance and feeling of superiority. This essay analyses the portrayal of feminine ideals in the story Beauty and the Beast. This paper argues that de Beaumont’s version of Beauty and the Beast transcended from the traditional feminine ideals, to present women as strong and willful rather than submissive and docile, even when they retained their virtue of kindness and generosity.

The setting of Beaumont’s Beauty and the Beast is the world of merchants and nobility (Beaumont 1). The story depicts a class struggle of the merchants and the nobles, where the merchant’s daughters dream of upward mobility. However, the struggle is dealt with only briefly and the story moved on to the good-natured “Little Beauty” in contrast to her arrogant and airy sisters. The story narrates the feminine virtues that all women must embrace through prosperity and poverty.

The story presents a prosperous family in the beginning and shows the selfless, humble, and genteel behavior of Beauty. Beaumont’s Beauty becomes the ideal for feminine virtues. The story clearly demonstrates the feminine virtues that Beaumont wanted to preach among young women – goodness, education, tolerance, and humility. She spins the tale of an ill-fated merchant and his family of six children – three daughters and three sons.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Beaumont emphasizes that all the children of the merchant were educated by stating, “… he spared no cost for their education” (1). The heroine of the story, Beauty, the youngest of the six children, and the most “handsome” of the three sisters wan the one with sweet temperament. Beauty was not just a woman of kindness and of feminine virtues, but also courageous and hard working. The virtues of Beauty were demonstrated through her selfless conduct.

First, when her father was rich, she did not lose her head in arrogance like her elder sisters and treated all with courtesy. Then when their fortunes fell, Beauty remained composed and helped her father and brothers in hard time through her help to do the household chores. Then in the end to prevent, her father going into the clutches of the Beast with whom she falls in love and then marries. Her virtues are hailed and rewarded when the Beast turns out to be a prince under a fairy’s curse and becomes the Queen.

Beaumont’s Beauty and the Beast is actually the story of Beauty. Beaumont actually adapted the story of Beauty and the Beast as a moralistic story for the education of young women. The true virtuosity of Beauty is revealed when she learns to keep a household and do the household chores even though she was not accustomed to work like a servant. Beaumont wants to reveal that hard work is another ideal for women, and they should take pride in doing household chores rather than be lazy.

When her father learns of the safe journey of his lost ship, he asks his children what they want from the city. While Beauty’s sisters ask for dresses and jewels, Beauty in her modesty asks for a rose that Beaumont explain, “Not that Beauty cared for a rose, but she asked for something, lest she should seem by her example to condemn her sisters’ conduct, who would have said she did it only to look particular.” (Beaumont 3)

Through this, Beaumont emphasizes that women of ideals would know the financial situation as well as the men and would take care not to squander hard-earned money. Beauty’s virtues are further demonstrated when she decides that it would be she who goes to live with the Beast in order to save her father’s life.

Though Beauty remains visibly scared of the Beast initially, she learns to like the heart within the scary facade, and a friendship between the two evolves. This demonstrates that Beauty had successfully transcended from her fears and prejudice against those who looked ugly even though she truthfully acknowledges it. Here Beaumont imbibes another ideal for women – always speak the truth. An ideal woman is one who speaks the truth, even if it is not endearing to the other’s ears.

Beauty has an unending sense of duty. Beaumont adorns her heroine with a sense of duty that is shown in all course of the story. She worked for the household as she feels it to be her duty to take care of the house – “Beauty rose at four in the morning, and made haste to have the house clean, and dinner ready for the family.” (Beaumont 2) However, it must be noted that Beaumont emphasizes that the female must work within the household, and that is her rightful duty.

We will write a custom Essay on Beauty and the Beast specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Beauty again becomes the ideal female, unlike her sisters who were lazy. However, it must be noted that the sphere of women’s work, as demarcated by Beaumont is the household. Beauty’s sense of duty is expressed further when she decides to go and live with the Beast in place of her father demonstrating that a daughter must be ready to sacrifice herself for the safety of her family (expressed as her father in the story).

However, it must be noted that Beaumont in her version of the story leaves it as a choice for Beauty to decide for herself if she wanted to do the sacrifice for her father and she viewed it as her duty rather than sacrifice as has been expressed in earlier version of the story by Madame de Villeneuve’s story (153-229). Therefore, Beaumont stresses the feeling of duty towards her parents should be an innate quality of women and should not be confused as a sacrifice.

Beaumont stressed the need to avoid vices in women through the discourse of the evil and conniving elder sisters of Beauty. Through the character of the sisters, Beaumont created an “other” for the genteel Beauty in order to demonstrate the vices that should be present in female character.

Beaumont in the very beginning of the story sates that Beauty was the youngest of the sisters but she was admired the most: “… but everyone admired the youngest one in particular…. [and] called her simply ‘Little Beauty’…. as a result it led to a great deal of envy on the part of her sisters” (Beaumont 1). Beauty relation with her sisters creates her character as a humble female.

Beauty stats that in order to hide her sister’s follies she asks for a rose from her father: “Not that Beauty cared for a rose, but she asked for something, lest she should seem by her example to condemn her sisters’ conduct, who would have said she did it only to look particular.” (Beaumont 3) In another instance, when Beauty returns to visit her family for a week, the evil sisters were unhappy to see Beauty so happy and adorned in riches. This leads them to plot against her:

Beauty’s sisters sickened with envy, when they saw her dressed like a princess, and more beautiful than ever, nor could all her obliging affectionate behavior stifle their jealousy, which was ready to burst when she told them how happy she was.

They went down into the garden to vent it in tears; and said one to the other, in what way is this little creature better than us, that she should be so much happier? “Sister,” said the oldest, “a thought just strikes my mind; let us endeavor to detain her above a week, and perhaps the silly monster will be so enraged at her for breaking her word, that he will devour her.” (Beaumont 12)

They were envious of their little sister’s good fortune and lamented over their misfortunes. They chose their husband unwisely as the elder fell for the love of good looks and the second daughter fell for wit. Bet both their husbands mistreated and neglected them. The otherness Beaumont created through the elder sisters showed the vices that women should not have.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Beauty and the Beast by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Beauty’s sisters through their envious nature, constant harmful actions against their younger sister, and Beauty’s constant forgiveness outshine her and bring forth her positive qualities. Therefore, beauty’s good qualities set at the backdrop of the conniving evil elder sisters bring forth the former’s good nature. Beauty realised her true self through the unkindness and egocentricity that she did not want her husband to be neither handsome nor witty like her sisters.

On the contrary, she wanted a husband who was caring and warm hearted like the Beast. This self-realization of beauty to ultimately marry the beast was brought forth through the wickedness of her sisters. Thus, beauty’s unwavering kindness was received with wealth and happiness, while the wicked sisters were punished for their treachery and are turned into statues that would constantly witness their sister’s kindness and learn from her warm nature.

Beaumont undoubtedly wanted Beauty to become the ideal feminine role model with all the traditional values of kindness, generosity, humbleness, self-sacrificing, and trustworthy. However, her Beauty digresses from her predecessor’s Beauty in her essence of self-identity. Beauty is the individual in Beaumont’s novel. She is a girl with all the virtues of a true feminine irrespective of her class. Villeneuve recounts that her Beauty was of noble birth, and therefore, her good nature was innate to royalty (220).

However, Beauty of Beaumont was good-natured naturally irrespective of the class she belonged to. Further, in Beaumont’s story beauty assumed the central and maximum attention. In contrast to Villeneuve version of the story, Beaumont clearly omits a few lengthy areas of her predecessor’s novel – the episode of the beast’s early life. The Beast in Beaumont’s story is a character that supports in demonstrating beauty’s graciousness.

Beaumont creates allegorical beauty who loves books and she derives some of her good nature from her love of good books. Therefore, she stresses that beauty was a reading woman to emphasize the importance of education in young women. Therefore, many believe Beaumont’s Beauty was created in the middle class background, and not in the noble class, with the specific desire to create a new kind of heroine “specifically to reinforce the goals of the meritocracy for the young women who were the intended audience” (Cummins 23-5).

Beaumont’s Beauty is scholarly and has an intellectual element in her stature. Beauty amused herself with reading even when she did all the household chores. When at the Beast’s palace, Beauty explored the house, discovered “Beauty’s Apartment”, and found there a large library:

She opened it hastily, and was quite dazzled with the magnificence that reigned throughout; but what chiefly took up her attention, was a large library, a harpsichord, and several music books. (Beaumont 8)

Beaumont stressed that even when beauty was alone and afraid she found courage in her books, again stressing on the importance of education for women. Therefore, need for education for reformation of women formed an important discourse in Beaumont’s story.

So, was Beaumont creating a heroine who was educated and well read, full of virtue, but was docile, submissive like the traditional women, and feminine? Was Beaumont trying to show that the true mark of a woman was in her obedience, humility, and patience? On reading the story from the point of view of a modern feminist, Beaumont’s Beauty emerges as a submissive character that shows women to be self-sacrificing at the cost of drowning their won desires, and subjugating to the marriages that are arranged by their family in depicting beauty’s situation at the Beast’s castle is concerned.

Further, the aristocratic girl in Beaumont’s story is shown that one should be wise enough to marry a man who may appear as a beast at first appearance, but a true woman can transform even a beast to a beautiful prince (Griswold 63). Nevertheless, one must acknowledge that it was written in the eighteenth century and from the point of view of the then prevalent social orders, Beaumont appears to be a radical feminist.

One of the most radical views presented in the book was equal education for both boys and girls, when the then prevalent social norm was to school only boys. Beaumont’s Beauty is not always submissive as her beauty may recoil with horror at the first sight of the Beast but that does not prevent her from speaking her mind. This shows the willpower in the heroine. Then her decision to save her father was taken as she felt that she had equal responsibility to save her father like her brothers, and not as an act of sacrifice.

Further, when Beauty returns to meet her father, she indulges in her own wishes and does not submit to the Beast’s orders. Therefore, from the context of eighteenth century, the book upholds female independence and education that may seem trivial from today’s context but then, assumed great importance. Thus, Beaumont’s Beauty emerges not as a heroine but as a female hero in her Beauty and the Beast.

Works Cited Beaumont, Jeanne Marie Le Prince de. Beauty and the Beast. NA: Forgotten Books. , 1756. Print.

Cummins, June. “Romancing the Plot: The Real Beast of Disney’s Beauty and the Beast .” Children’s Literature Association Quarterly, 20(1) (1995): 22–8. Print.

Griswold, Jerome. The meanings of “Beauty and the Beast”: a handbook. Toronto: Broadview Press, 2004. Print.

Villeneuve, Gabrielle Suzanne de. “The Story of Beauty and the Beast.”.” Zipes., Jack. Beauties, Beasts, and Enchantment: Classic French Fairy Tales. New York: Smithmark Publishers, 1989. 153–229. Print.

Walker, Lesley H. A mother’s love: crafting feminine virtue in Enlightenment France. Cranbury, NJ: Associated University Presse, 2008. Print.

Zipes, Jack David. Fairy tale as myth/myth as fairy tale . Kentucky: University Press of Kentucky, 1994. Print.


Arguments on the unscientific nature of astrology Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Karl Popper, Thomas Kuhn and many philosophers argue that astrology is a pseudoscience, although they have different explanations as to why it is considered a pseudoscience. Arguments vary from issues of Popperian’s variability and falsifiability, to questions of progress and Kuhn’s normal science, to the different sorts of tests raised by the scientific community.

However, in establishing the arguments it is necessary to understand what constitutes a pseudoscience and what astrology entails (Thagard 223). Astrology is an ancient practice and is a collection of systems, traditions and beliefs that argue that the relative position and movement of heavenly bodies can dictate human life and other worldly occurrences.

According to Popper, the apparent problem with astronomy is that it is unfalsifiable and that an astrologer cannot make predictions that if disgruntled could lead him/her to own up his theory. Thus since it is not falsifiable, astronomy is not scientific. Popper notes no observation statements are corrigible, that is, methodological decisions about what can be tampered with are required to block the escape from falsification.

Thus, falsification only takes place when a more reliable theory grows, and it is only an issue replaceability by another, and because astronomy is in principle replaceable by another theory, falsification gives no reason for rebuffing astronomy as pseudoscience. Astrology can used to predict about statistical methodologies, but the absence of these regularities does not imply falsification of astrology, although astrology appears equal to the scientific theories that too are not falsified until better theories come up.

On the significance of semantic meticulousness in science, Popper cautions: “criticism will be fruitful only if we state our problem as clearly as we can and put our solution in a sufficiently definite form-a form in which it can be critically discussed” (as cited by Curd


The Privatization or Commodification of Water Research Paper college application essay help

Introduction For a long time, ethics has been seen as the study of what comprises good and bad conduct which includes the values that influence the conduct. Generally, contemporary culture has given humans unprecedented liberty and prosperity which has necessitated the growth of the concept of ethics.

Business ethics on the other hand has existed in the form of reflection on the ethical dimensions of business exchanges and institutions whereby the concept has been understood in two distinctive ways, where one group views it from the background of philosophy while the other group views it from the background of business community (Brenkert and Beauchamp 3).

These two approaches are not exclusive, but the philosophical approach appears to be the broader of the two. In all cases, it becomes important to appreciate the fact that moral problems and the process of analyzing them invites different forms of useful analysis.

Water forms an essential commodity that ensures continuity of life, though for a long time no systematic way has been elaborated in appreciating its value (Brown and Schmidt 3). For long, people have regarded water as a renewable commodity that has potential to develop without limit. With the larger society utilizing water in different ways such as irrigation, energy and burgeoning urban centers, the reality is now clearer that like just other renewable commodities, water is a finite resource.

However, providing answers to modern water problems requires giving answers to questions of value: how should society capture, store or distribute water; at what cost; for whom; and for how long (Brown and Schmidt 4). All these questions are regarded as ethical because just like any other essential resource, determining a fair and just distribution of water has direct effects on human and nonhuman lives and also the systems that sustain them.

Commodification of water Borgmann argues that the driving force of the contemporary society is the aspect of commodification which is described as, that vital structure of modern society of the market which conveys a sense of moral censure (Borgmann 143).

The author, in reference to Viviana Zelizer, states that, “economic prophets have frequently warned us against global commodification and the loss of the moral-emotional fiber it brings” (Borgmann 144). Using the Marx’s concept of commodification, Borgmann first sees the concept to possess the verb to commodify, which to him is “to draw something from outside the market into the market so that it becomes available for sale and purchase” (Borgmann 144).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Marx looked at the various ways in which capitalism perceived the production of things such as wheat, shoes and clothing out of the hands and circumstances of the farmers, artisan and householders, stripped them of their context of skills and persons, of exchanges and uses and made them into commodities (goods) whose importance was reduced to their price.

Moreover, Marx became critical of how labor was being converted into something that could be purchased and sold under conditions that only favored the capitalists and made the workers beggars (Borgmann 144); thus, commodification became purely and totally exploitation.

The contemporary discussions continue to see the concept of commodification as contested. In such discussions, the broader agreement has remained that, certain goods such as justice should never be for sale (Borgmann 145). But other goods have continued to draw divided opinions.

For a long time, goods at issue in this discussion have generally constituted those in Michael Walzer’s list of items which are subject to ‘blocked exchanges’: 1) Human beings; 2) political power and influence; 3) criminal justice; 4) freedom of speech, press, religion, assembly; 5) marriage and procreation; 6) the right to leave the political community; 7) exemptions from military service, from jury duty, and from any other form of communally imposed work; 8) political offices; 9) basic welfare services like police protection or primary and secondary schooling; 10) desperate exchanges; 11) prizes and honors of many sorts; 12) divine grace; 13) love and friendship; and 14) a long series of criminal sales (Borgmann p.145).

The above list can be complete if addition of certain public goods is made. These public goods are; clean air and clean water, safety from crime, basic health care and public lands. The main argument in disfavor of commodification of public goods is that commodification may leads to social injustice, for instance, if education is totally commodified, the children of the poor will get no education or for them, inferior education will be enough (Borgmann p.145).

Commodification of water: Public vs. Private debate There exist two debates that continue to dominate the lives of many people concerning the issue of water. For instance, there are arguments whether water services should remain public or go private. One of the arguments “is concerned with practical issues of efficiency and economics, and the other is about principle” (Snitow, Kaufman and Fox p.10).

Privatizing water in a country like USA has been a hard venture to undertake. Those opposed to such move include personalities such as Barlow of the Council of Canadians and Tony Clarke of Canada’s Polaris Institute (Snitow, Kaufman and Fox 10). The two have opposed the move to privatize water in principle and they are convinced that private companies should only get involved in narrow areas of infrastructure development but not allowed to have ownership, control or delivery of the basic service.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Privatization or Commodification of Water specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To them, the process or actions of commodifying water is generally wrong in terms of ethics, environmental and social (Snitow, Kaufman and Fox p.10). They are on the view that the process will, “insure that decisions regarding the allocation of water would center on commercial, not environmental or social justice considerations; privatization means that management of water resources is based on principles of scarcity and profit maximization rather than long-term sustainability” (Snitow, Kaufman and Fox 10).

Contrary to this position, there is a divergent view which has been adopted by Peter Cook of the National Association of Water Companies who is convinced that if market principles are applicable to other products in the market, then water as a commodity cannot be exceptional.

Cook sees nothing wrong or unethical in making profits from water since the money which has been pumped into the business by the investors is used to benefit customers and provide them with services. Cook sums up his position by quoting the bible by stating that, the bible and especially the Ten Commandments have no provision that prohibits people from making profits, and utilities need to be operated as enterprises (Snitow, Kaufman and Fox pp.10-11).

To this extent, “the practical debate over who can provide water better focuses on the issues of transparency, efficiency, rates, and sustainability” (Snitow, Kaufman and Fox pp.11).. Indeed, most of these values are possible in public controlled enterprises but far more difficult in private owned enterprises or corporations.

Ethical dilemma

The essence of water being a commodity that sustains life has drawn conflicting debates and reactions on whether it is ethical to commodify and therefore subject it to market competition principles.

This particular confusion has been precipitated by the actions of United Nations to declare that water is a human right that should be accessible to everyone. The question that arises is; are their moral consequences that arise as a result of commodifying water and hence its availability and accessibility largely become determined by market mechanisms?

Ethical lapse

In most cases, ethical lapse can be categorized into three groups: deception, stealing and harming (Howard and Korver 13). There exists many variants to these but the mentioned three have come out as the most wrongdoings which people commit.

Lying has been described in many ways that include: doctor, cover up, overstate, understate, misinform, misguide or stretch the truth (Howard and Korver p.14). additionally, the act of lying has psychological costs, for example, when individuals lie there is always a clash between their values and who they are; lying also creates barriers in relationships and soils self-image of an individual (Howard and Korver p.15).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Privatization or Commodification of Water by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Moral reasoning

The contemporary society is faced with a situation where people are facing dilemma on various ethical decisions and as a result there have been numerous methods of moral reasoning.

Moral reasoning has taken center stage in various social issues as people continue to debate on what is right and what is wrong or what ought to be or not be done. In most cases many people are convinced that it is not necessary the principles which determine what is right or wrong, but the consequences produced by the actions in question (Rae p.81). When a particular course of action or decision produces the best set of consequences, then to majority such actions need to be allowed and accepted.

In other words the action(s) that produces the greatest balance of benefits over harms is the one that is considered as the most moral. Generally actions considered right or wrong (morality) should depend on the situation and also on what the cultural consensus of right and wrong is at that time. In the case of commodifying water, if the society and hence culture reaches consensus that water commodification is wrong then it would be morally wrong to commodify or privatize water.

Ethical approaches Utilitarianism ethics

Utilitarianism ethics postulate that morality of an act is determined by the end result. From this observation, utilitarianism conviction is that the moral choice is the one that produces the greatest good for the greatest number of people or at the same time the moral choice is the course of action that produces more good consequences than harmful ones.

Utilitarianism sometimes is regarded as consequentialism ethics due to its emphasis on the consequences of an action. Jeremy Bentham, one of the philosophers credited to utilitarianism believed in hedonistic utilitarianism which postulates that “the most moral acts are those that maximize pleasure and minimize pain” (Rae p.85).

On the other hand John Mill, another believer of utilitarianism ethics established his approach which differed from that of Bentham which was general concept of maximizing the general happiness, or what he termed as the greatest good for the greatest number. Hence ethics can be seen as the art of directing the actions of people so as to bring about the greatest possible happiness to all those who are concerned with these actions.

As a result, Bentham observed that the interests of the community are simply the sum of the interests of its members. In sum the utilitarianism principle hold that, “an action is right from an ethical point of view if and only if the sum total of utilities produced by that act is greater than the sum total of utilities produced by any other act the agent could have performed in its place” (Fernando p.34).

Water commodification can be analyzed within the precepts of utilitarianism ethics where business principles can take a backseat to consequences, if on balance, commodification of water provides more beneficial consequences for more people then utilitarianism ethics consider it to be the most moral choice.

Evaluation of actions needs to be made on the basis of benefits or harms the action(s) will bring upon human beings. The morality of the theory is that, individual or an organization performing particular actions need to impartially take into account interests of everyone on equal basis.

Kantian ethics

Kant was convinced that morality should be derived from recognition that people share a common human condition and what makes humans valuable and special is their ability to reason and that moral rules based on reason should govern human behavior.

To Kant moral rules need to be based on tradition, intuition, desire, conscience, emotion and sympathy and that free will among humans comes from their ability to reason and prompts them to develop rules for moral behavior which in turn can be applicable universally disregarding utilitarianism consequences.

The moral rules established needs to recognize the fact that all people have a certain human dignity and therefore they should be accorded respect as autonomous beings (Fernando p.35). According to Kant moral ethics, an action is only moral for an individual in a certain situation if, and only if, the individual’s reason for carrying out the action is one that he or she would be willing to have every person act on in any similar situation.

At the same time moral worth would not be attached to an action motivated singularly to promote individual interests or for pleasure and that if an action is wrong for other people, it is wrong for any one person. For Kant an action is regarded morally worth if it reflects a good will and it is only when individuals act from duty that their actions are regarded to be moral worth. As a result Kant believes that ethics should be grounded in reason alone and not on human nature (Fernando p.35).

Ethicality in commodifying water On November 27 2002, United Nation declared water to be a human right for the first time and went a head to require states to adopt key legal mechanisms that would ensure this fundamental right is achieved (Sierra Club par. 1). From UN observation, the conviction was that privatizing water could not be achieved since it is impossible to marry the profit motive of a private enterprise and the necessity and importance of a commodity like water which many people require in order to survive (utilitarianism).

The conclusion is that the issue of rendering water as a private thing should be done away from the market place since water belongs to earth, to all species, to the future generation and in this regard no one has the right to commodify water for personal (deontological) or corporate gain (Sierra Club par. 1).

On advancing this claim, the Cochabamba Declaration of December 8, 2000, which brought together interested parties aimed at ensuring the privatization of water, was not achieved (welfare concern). To cement and solidify their claim the group came up with key points to be observed which turned out to constitute the Cochabamba Declaration (Sierra Club par. 4).

To the group access to water is the fundamental right of every human and all humans are required to respect nature as they use water given by the earth. The three main points formulated were:

Water was described to belong to the earth and also to all species of the world and that water need to be regarded as sacred to life, and from this view the water of the world needs to be conserved, reclaimed and put under adequate protection in order to ensure the future generation is safe;

Water was described as fundamental human right and also as a public trust that needs to be guarded by all structures of the government and as a result it should not be commodified, privatized or commercially traded; lastly

Water can be best protected by local communities and people and who must be given equal respect as partners of various governments in the process of protecting and regulating water (Sierra Club par. 5).

Conclusion Water ethic has developed in many societies as a result of continued efforts by enterprises and corporation to commodifying water. As a result, in most societies specifically the developed ones, water ethics commodification and privatization with marginalized access to water continue to raise key questions such as:

Can water be sustainably managed while the global financial institutions and transnational corporations possess the means to do so? How can the empowerment of public and rights of people over water be restored? How can global skills, capital and user practices are reconciled with the need and desire for control over water of local people? Such questions give an impression of how fundamental ethics has become essential in addressing the issue of water commodification. Ethical reasoning in regards to water will ensure proper, efficient and sustainable use of water despite its scarcity in nature.

Works Cited Borgmann, Albert. Real American ethics: taking responsibility for our country. IL, University of Chicago Press. 2006. Web.

Brenkert, George G. and Beauchamp, Tom L. The Oxford Handbook of Business Ethics. NY, Oxford University Press US. 2009. Web.

Brown, Peter G. and Schmidt, Jeremy J. Water Ethics: Foundational Readings for Students and Professionals. NW, Island Press. 2010. Web.

Fernando, A. C. Business Ethics: An Indian Perspective. New Delhi, Pearson Education India, 2009. Web.

Howard, Ronald A. and Korver, Clinton D. Ethics for the real world: creating a personal code to guide decisions in work and life. MA, Harvard Business Press. 2008. Web.

Rae, Scott B. Moral Choices: An Introduction to Ethics. MI, Zondervan, 2000. Web.

Sierra Club. Corporate Water Privatization: Water is a Human Right not a Commodity. 2008. Web.

Snitow, Allan, Kaufman, Deborah and Fox, Michael. Thirst: fighting the corporate theft of our water. C. A., John Wiley and Sons. 2007. Web.


The social performance of Hewlett Packard Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help

Introduction Hewlett Packard Company is an Information Technology company which was founded in 1939 by Bill Hewlett and Dave Packard. The firm has its corporate headquarters located at Palo Alto in USA. Over the years, the firm has been able to enhance its awareness globally. As a result, the firm has managed to be among the most respected organizations in the world through incorporation of corporate social responsibility.

The discussion of this essay is aimed at conducting a comprehensive analysis of Hewlett Packard Company with the objective of its performance in the society. It achieves this by highlighting its achievement and highlighting the areas where the firm’s management team should improve on.

Environment conservation

Over the recent past, there has been increased concern with regard to the increment in the volume of waste resulting from electronic technology companies. Some of the stakeholders concerned include customers, governments and business organizations .Electronic waste includes various products such as laptops, iPods, cell phones, TVs, printers among others.

A recent increase in electronic wastes has made it an issue of concern among these stakeholders due to their hazardous nature. This is because E-waste contains lethal substances such as mercury, lead and arsenic. This is one of the reasons why HP embarked on recycling the used electronic components since 1987. At the moment, HP is providing the customers with ways of returning the computers already purchased when they become obsolete.

Leasing is proving to be effective means of combating unorthodox means of disposing electronic garbage. Selling original print cartridges is meant to reduce negative impacts of environment pollution by not dealing with remanufactured cartridges. In 2005, the company managed to recycle print cartridge and computer hardware weighing at least 140 pounds.

Being a global giant in providing computer hardware, it is the first company to report greenhouse emissions associated with its production and manufacturing process. This illustrates how that the company is applying transparent techniques and is encouraging others to join the fight against electronic pollution.

In 2007, Hewlett Packard was able to drastically cut down and reduce carbon emission by approximately 4%. Wal-Mart Stores had invited the technological company to design a product which has minimal impact. It is important to acknowledge the fact that since it won the award, it has provided solution that greatly reduces environmental impact of Personal Computers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The design does not have conventional shipping materials hence HP products are greatly reduced in size (Environment leader, 2010). In 2008, it was awarded the Green Recycling Asset Disposal for the Enterprise (GRADE) certification by IDC which further boosted its image. GRADE aims at providing organizations with ideas on how to dispose information technology assets.


HP has been in the forefront with regard to promoting education. This arises from realization of the fact that high quality education is crucial for sustainable economic growth. Equal opportunities for both men and women in Africa are essential in eliminating poverty (Isaacs, 2002, p. 3).

As a global information technology leader in innovation, the company provides sophisticated equipments and technical services to learning institutions around the world. HP has been supporting teaching with aid of technology in many American and Canadian schools. In 2005, it provided 35 universities with wireless technologies for mobile communication around the world.

In an effort to ensure that consumers access education, the company has incorporated the HP Scholarship Program. The program targets mainly African Americans, the Native Americans and the Latinos. The selected students pursue engineering and computer science in any of the HP partner universities such as North Carolina A


The Civil War Dilemmas: Slave-Owner Relations Expository Essay college application essay help

In the middle of the 1800s, slavery and interpersonal relations between people with different social conditions were considered to be one of the most burning issues for consideration. Different families introduced absolutely different attitudes to the idea of slavery and owner-slave relations.

The vast majority of rich people did not find it necessary to respect their slaves and introduce appropriate treatment. However, there were many cases when families took unbelievable care for their slaves and realized that human questions should go first if it was necessary.

Nowadays, it is very hard for modern people to imagine how it is to be a slave and to be dependent on other people’s wishes and demands. It is impossible to comprehend what made people demonstrate their power over other people. However, it is also difficult to believe that many people were eager to protect their slaves and provide them with necessary treatment in respect to their assistance in house keeping or other duties.

Slavery has to be regarded as an obscure question in the Civil War that divided people into groups, made them fight against each other, and forgot about the amenities of human life that was given to everyone; and in this paper, an attempt to evaluate slavery and to define its strong and weak sides under different conditions will be made.

The question of slaves’ role in society turned out to be crucial in the development of interpersonal relations and played an important role in the history considering as one of the main reasons of the Civil War. In one of the letters written during the times before the Civil War, there was mentioned a true nature of slavery: it was said that “each


The Experience of War by Women Essay a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Analysis of the Experiences of Women in the War


Works Cited

Introduction The valley of the shadow depicts two communities during the American civil war of 1860-1865 with one community northern and the other southern specifically the Franklin County in Pennsylvania and Augusta county of Virginia. The period of war had great impact on women varying from their work, social status, age, race and family.

The women had a rich social experience of the war that was represented in their diaries, letters and other war documents. They expressed themselves differently and were concerned about different issues prior to the war, during the war and after the war period. The women ranged from slave owners, the wives to the soldiers, mothers, daughters, slaves to young girls.

The records of these women reveal their fears, anxiety, opinions on the war and their attitude. They also represent their devotions to family, their country, God and the struggle in the war. They are thus not only historical, but they provide rich information on the role of these women in the war, their reactions to the war, the climate and social conditions at the time and the place of women in society at the time.

The Analysis of the Experiences of Women in the War While most of the women received letters from their loved ones especially those whose relatives were involved in the war, they also wrote letters to their loved ones, authorities, kept diaries and were depicted in the documentaries of the time (Ayers 10).

The analysis of these women shall include the mothers, daughters, wives, young girls of varying races and background. The analysis evaluates their devotion to their families, God and religion, their struggles during the war, the level of their education and other social issues (Whitman and Lowenfels 12).

The period of the Civil War was characterized by a separation of the families. This was with soldiers going to war leaving their families behind; children in school away from their families and the separation of relatives for other reasons.

The diaries of the women show their attachment to their families and their need to keep in touch with them. Fannies in the letter to her cousins (Ayers 17) keeps in touch through informing her cousins of the weather, the cold season, among others and sends them another letter too to know of their well being. Melly Clayton writes to her aunt about how her family is doing (Ayers 27).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Carter Sue writes and laments about her separation from her family showing the deep connection she had with them. In the letter of the Houser family, Mollie writes to her cousin about her family and relates the news to her cousin. The war time diary and letters of the Smiley family are about the relatives and family whereabouts (Ayers and Rubin 39).

The women wrote the letters to their relatives and family mostly in the war and away from home to inform them of what was going on at their homes (Ayers 33). For example, in the war letter of the McGuffin family, the mother writes to her son to inform him of the life at home, his brother and to enquire of his welfare.

The letters describe the love and devotion to the family. Maria Perkins who was a slave at the time wrote to her husband about the sale of her son, herself and the other children. The letters were also for the happy family moments. For example, Alansa in her diary talks of her marriage and slavery of her uncle to whom she was close.

The devotion of the women to God and religion at the time was evident in their letters and diaries. This devotion came out of fear, desperation and the painful moments of the war (Ayers and Rubin 59).

Anna Mellinger in her diary reveals her devotion to God through the prayer meetings, readings of the word from the Bible, mention of prayer and the evidence of faith (Ayers 38). The diaries and letters also represent the devotion to religious meetings. Melly Clayton in her letter to her aunt informs her of a possible religious camp meeting to be held in September (Ayers 40).

They also show the struggles of the women to maintain their Christian faith. For example, in her diary Wright Sarah shows her struggles to adapt to the Christian principles. The religious faith is also revealed through the attitude of optimism while some of them linked the war to God’s punishment to them. For example, Emerson Nancy in her diary perceived that the war was a result of God’s punishment to the Northern people for their sins (Ayers and Rubin 63).

Others had faith that God would reunite their families after the war and grant them peace. For example, Sue Carter expresses her faith for the reunion. The letters of Armentrout Kate are based on the Christian affairs, the unity prayer meetings and other religious activities. Religion acts as a consolidation for the women. For example, Harris Anna in her letter of 1860 shows her tribulations but reveals her assurance of God’s consolation (Whitman and Lowenfels 97).

We will write a custom Essay on The Experience of War by Women specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The letters represent the level of education of the women. Most of the letters had grammatical errors with the knowledge of Basic English language. The letters however represent the abilities of the women in writing and basic reading thus justifying the fact that the women had gained basic education. This level of language proficiency is however not represented in all the women since the slaves and younger children represent a lack of proficiency as compared to the slave owners and those of the white race (Whitman and Lowenfels 121).

For example, the letters of Mollie Houser use language in the wrong tense, lack punctuation, have grammatical errors and appear like a direct translation. However, for the women who have gone through school such as Armentrout Kate, the letters are more grammatically correct and she makes use of more complex language as compared to the other women.

The letters and diary information also revealed the knowledge of the women about the war and the contribution and attitudes towards the same (Ayers 78). They also revealed their fears, agony and the decisions they made during the time. For example, Mollier in her letter of April 5, 1864 is concerned about the welfare of the soldiers in the war and wishes that the war would end soon.

Harris Anna in her letter of January 5, 1860 shows the trials and afflictions from the war since her friends were soldiers in the war. In her letter Fackler Lizzie shows her whereabouts of the war evident from the fear she has of the invasion of Yankee in Staunton. The diary of Mellinger Anna shows the period of the war and how she escaped with her family.

The letters and diaries of the women did not fail to touch on women issues such as the gossip and the whereabouts of others as well as the concept of relationships and weddings.

For example, Mollier talks of her wedding and the fact that she wants to engage in a relationship. Alansa talks of her life and her marriage while all the letters are descriptive showing the detailed messages and the description with the expression of themselves. The letters reveal the fears of the women and their desire for peace and stability with unity in their families and the end of the war (Ayers and Rubin 71).

The letters also revealed the historical times and the developments at the time while those written after the war by the women provided family history and the whereabouts of relatives (Ayers and Rubin 77). This shows that the women did not experience death during the war in large numbers but lost their relatives, family and friends and their concern reveals their love for their families.

For example, Martha in her letter of 1867 informs her nephew about the family history as well as the other families and relatives that he knew. The letters also represent schooling and education with the evidence of young girls writing about school and the events following the same. For example, Clayton writes about her school experience to her aunt, while Alaska talks of her schooling. The issues of racism are exposed by the information and the perceptions of the writers towards the same (Whitman and Lowenfels 234).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Experience of War by Women by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The period after the war is rife with information about the deaths and whereabouts of the families with the women sharing the same to their relatives. For example, the diary of Emerson Nancy reveals the deaths of the people she knew and the expression of frustration, loss and bitterness (Ayers and Rubin 98).

Summary The experiences of the women provide a rich history of the Civil War through the issues they went through and witnessed. They experienced the Civil War differently depending on their race, age or status.

However, the nature of women is similar in the aspects of their attitudes towards religion, love and devotion to their families, struggles and the desire for peace in the country, the frustrations and losses experienced in the war and their attitudes towards the war. The analysis of the women opens the opportunity for understanding the modern times with the perceptions of society towards the role of women.

Works Cited Ayers, Edward. The Valley of the Shadow, 2010. Web. .

Ayers, Edward, and Anne Rubin. The Valley of the Shadow: Two Communities in the American Civil War – The Eve of War. New York: W.W. Norton Company, 2000.

Whitman, Walt, and Walter Lowenfels. Civil War. Boston: Knopf Publications, 1961.


Current Issues in Human Resource Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

BP’s Human Resource department strategies

Employee development

Employee’s relations and grievance handling



Importance of HRM practices to organizations



Introduction British Petroleum (BP), headquartered in St. James’s, City of Westminster, London, is ranked number three among the largest energy companies in the world. Founded in 1909 as the Anglo-Persian Oil Company, the company has grown to be a multinational oil company and it is listed in the London Stock Exchange (British Petroleum, 2010, para. 1). Since it is the largest corporation in the United Kingdom, it forms part of the FTSE 100 index.

In 1998, the company came out of a partnership with its American-based counterpart, Amoco, and it has now established business operations across six continents. The core activities of the company are “exploration and production are exploration and production of crude oil and natural gas; refining, marketing, supply and transportation; and manufacturing and marketing of petrochemicals” (BP, 2010, para. 1). This paper analyzes the current issues in the company’s HR department.

The Human Resource Department is endowed with the task of assisting the organization it is representing in attaining its goals and meeting the needs of its workers. This department is the hub of the company acting as a liaison between all the parties concerned with the aim of improving the performance of the organization.

The efforts of the HR Department are increasingly being recognized as an essential element in organizational success; therefore, a major focus of the department’s interventions is an effort to influence the behavior of the employees. It is important to note that providing the workforce with the necessary expertise and behaviour is able to make an organization to realize its objectives. Therefore, the HR Department plays a pivotal role in influencing the behaviour of the employees in an organization.

BP’s Human Resource department strategies BP’s HR department has implemented a number of strategies aimed at encouraging positive employee behaviour. The Board of Directors, who makes important decisions that affect the running of the activities of the international corporation, manages the company.

The company’s mission statement reads, “In all our activities we seek to display some unchanging, fundamental qualities – integrity, honest dealing, treating everyone with respect and dignity, striving for mutual advantage and contributing to human progress.” While its vision statement reads, “to be the world leader in transportation products and related services” (Man on a Mission, 2005).

In a traditional organization model, a hierarchical structure is usually observed. In this case, a president or executive is usually regarded as the top most official followed by vice presidents or the position of senior managers. After this, different levels of management follow. Most of the employees are usually found at the bottom of the hierarchy and jobs are grouped by function into various departments (Ansoff, 1965).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Before major transformations were done, this was the case at BP. The company was categorized into various autonomous automakers, which functioned separately and competed with one another. However, the rivalry and absence of centralization within the company proved to be an expensive affair for the company.

Therefore, as a major HR strategy, BP adopted the transformed organizational model, which is centralized and cohesive than the traditional model. Regardless of its size or complexity, the company has been able to arrange its diverse workforce coming from different parts of the world to ensure that its operations are run in a streamlined manner.

All the company’s employees are now working towards a common goal and running the company has been more cost effective. In its transformed structure, BP lacks many different departments. Most of the company’s departments are performing the same tasks with related requirements. Thus, this centralized organizational structure makes more sense than the traditional one.

The adoption of the transformed organizational model has made BP to have centralized staff functions. The change that was carried out radically changed its diverse workforce, including its management, since they had to learn central set of skills.

For instance, before the adoption of the transformed model, the different regions in the company were using different computer software for carrying out their operations. This resulted in miscommunication between its different departments in the regions. The diverse workforce at BP was to be taught the basics of a central software program which resulted in easier inter-corporation communication.

The large undertaking also made the company’s production team to centralize their operations and learn from one another’s methods of design and engineering, which has resulted in a more productive and easier communication among them. Currently, the diverse workforce at BP communicates and embraces teamwork when working. They no longer work as individuals in completing a particular piece of the puzzle.

The transformed organizational model enabled the British company to merge its different brand operations. The traditional model made various operations in the automotive company to be redundant. This led to the wastage of resources and time. This is because its employees were duplicating work that had been already performed by another of the company’s different brands. The traditional model plagued the operations at the company for years.

We will write a custom Essay on Current Issues in Human Resource specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The transformed organizational model adopted by the HR Department has made the employees of GM to work on the same page. All of them are working towards realizing the same objective of preserving the core competence of the company of innovation.

Because of this initiative, the turnover of the company has dramatically increased in recent years. Its dominant position in the energy industry is largely attributed to the innovative culture that it has embraced in its transformed organizational model. Focus on innovation has also made the company to re-assess the market that it has been striving to approach. For a long time, the company had embraced a traditional outlook for energy production.

However, with the changing tastes and preferences of its customers, BP has taken a step back to examine critically its position in the market. To maintain this innovative culture, all the heads of the regional operations hold frequent meetings to assess the progress of the company. Global offices usually attend these meetings via phone; therefore, the CEO is able to monitor the progress of the company.

Employee development The transformed organizational model ensures that employee development within the company is encouraged. At BP, the management ensures that the workers are doing a commendable work. Achievement of this is by making the workers realize that their input in the organization is important, not just to be salaried at the end of the month.

The quality of the work usually disintegrates when employees fail to recognize the value of their input in the organization. At BP, the workers are encouraged that the place of work forms their second home and that they add value to the success of the organization. Individuals most of the time react better to a surrounding where their emotional well-being is properly taken care of. That is why the company’s HR department usually gives rewards to the most motivated employees to act as an encouragement to them.

In BP’s business environment, managers engage in employee development by motivating the workers, first by example. The managers or the supervisors of its various departments are often self-motivating. When an individual has the capability of being self-motivating, it becomes uncomplicated to pass this trait to others (Banfield


Richard Sennett’s account of the ‘new capitalism’ in relation to current organizations Essay essay help site:edu

There have been many economic systems in the history of the world, all formed out of various ideologies but the most prevalent one has been capitalism. Capitalism is a system whereby the means of production are in the hands of private owners and its main aim is making profits and more profits. Supply, demand, price, distribution, and investments decisions are determined by a liberated market and governments have little or no authority over the market.

The revenues from the entities are mainly for the owners and little is used to pay wages to workers. However, there is a new economic system that is developing in the world known as the new capitalism. New capitalism is a sociological phenomenon that has to do with the new economy effect on the human relationships. Sennett describes a scenario whereby corporations have changed from the bureaucracy organizations described by Weber (2006, p. 203).

Organizations today are not centered, they are unstable and diffuse; unlike the former pyramid-like corporate structures whereby people would know their status and therefore they could plan for the future because there were assured long-term stability, benefits, social capital, and interpersonal trust. Employees have to now prove themselves as valuable assets to the entity for them to secure their future by showing their potentiality rather than specialty and experience.

People demand services rather than goods. Capital, labor potential and innovations are the driving forces for the economic development. The system is generally characterized by: Globalization and automation, blue-collar jobs, unionized work, reduced manual work and an increase in value of professional workers.

The system thrives on economics, information architecture, cybernetics, game theory and information theory among other sciences and technologies. The ideology has been mainly developed by a sociologist Richard Sennett and a professor at the London School of Economics. He is very popular for his contribution and study of social relationships in cities, and the effects of urbanization on individuals in the modern world among other ideologies such as the liquid society.

New capitalism has led to the formation of a very liquid society due to the rapid changes in technology and society. People’s life’s now change at the same rate: nomadism has become a routine in all aspects of the modern man: people change their lives like a tourists, change places, jobs, spouses, values and sometimes political or sexual orientation (Sennett 2006, 203).

Modernity has evolved from solid to liquid creating unexpected situations for man; therefore making individuals face many new challenges that have not been there before. Institutions do not mature and solidify so a create foundation for human activities; they break before that happens hence man is prompted to find other ways to organize life.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More An individual must be prepared before engaging in any activity by analyzing its gains and losses first. The global economy has also shifted from being industrial to service oriented enterprise. Socially the modernity is characterized by movements fighting for civil rights and equality in the female gender and also multi-culturalism.

Sennett (1998, p. 221) argues that “the former political sphere was comprised of numerous arenas and possibilities of citizenship and political action concerning various forms of struggle against oppression or alienation (in collectives defined by sex or ethnicity) while the modernist political arena remains restricted to class struggle.”

Organizations in the private sector the social-welfare programs in collaboration with the government and agree to and execute general wage levels and also ensure the administration’s spends across the economy in favor of workers so as to avoid strikes and labor unrest.

The above explanations of new capitalism are evident in our societies therefore the changes are really happening. Recently the ANC banking group of Australia CEO gave a report citing that the banking sector globally is facing huge risks and uncertainties hence making operations to be very expensive.

This depicts the new capitalism type of organizations that operate with no stability and hence cannot also offer their employees reliable benefits because the entities themselves can collapse anytime. He said that the sector and specifically the bank need to concentrate on productivity and new innovations so as to stay relevant in the market; therefore changes have to be implemented.

New capitalism, according Sennet (1998, p. 87), is all about innovations and competition to stay relevant. He also said that the bank is intending to expand more globally and also engage in investment strategies worldwide hence the bank will be responding to the new capitalism requirements of globalization for the sake of its shareholders.

In another article the Labor Party in Australia is advocating for the increase in the SG (the compulsory contribution paid into a worker’s super account by their employer) from 9 per cent of gross pay to 12 per cent by 2019 (Fraser 2010, np). This will enable the employees to accumulate substantial savings that will guarantee them a good retirement.

We will write a custom Essay on Richard Sennett’s account of the ‘new capitalism’ in relation to current organizations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is an example of new capitalism ideologies where governments make policies that protect citizens from their employer’s meanness so that they can secure themselves a good future and also boosts the welfare of the entire country. Companies are also buying other organizations leading to mergers a phenomena that characterizes new capitalism ideologies.BHP Billitons a mining company in Australia ha s made a bid to the Potash Corp. of Saskatchewan Inc that manufactures potassium for farm use.

BHP wants to expand the company and make it a worldwide business because it has the potential since the commodity is essential the globally. This again is a globalization strategy; companies are seeking more revenues worldwide for Potash that is another reason as to why organizations today cannot be considered stable because they can undergo both management and economic changes anytime.

Some people consider BHP’s move a risk, analysts have cited that the purchase of Potash by it will lower its credit ratings. However, the management says “that company would not be facing a steep downgrade, because Potash Corporation would increase its geographic diversity and has solid medium and long-term prospects” (Bain 2010, np).

This is a display of uncertainty in decisions being made by organizations in the new economy. Some are risky ventures but they choose to continue in the hope that the venture will be successful and will therefore keep the entity relevant in the market. The prime media group has also been doing well, advertising spending has doubled and especially no w that there are election campaigns. “The group plans to pick up Seven Group Holdings Ltd’s newest digital channel, 7mate, due to launch on September 25” (Smith 2010, np).

Westfield chains of stores have also been doing well in their business and the director says the market is now not volatile but there are still uncertainties in the business’s environment. He says the stores have survived the recession and are now trying venture into new strategies so as to build a strong base for economic development.

However not all business in Australia are doing well the Direct Factory Outlets (DFO) retail chain has evaded receivership after its owners the Developer Austexx, made agreements with banks from which the chain has their loans. The banks have agreed to extend the loans for the chain for it to recover. The management has mentioned that the crisis has been due to bad decisions about expansion of the chain. Another company under crisis is the Downer EDI, an engineering company whose profits have declined by 90% from last year, s.

The company has blamed the global recession for this saying that it led to loss of investors both private and public. The company has also admitted to quality issues of their trains and also it says that it has not been able to meet deadlines of the requisitions made by customers. The management has said that the company is making changes both operational and organizational so as to improve its services and performance.

The Australian timber company Gunn’s is also in crisis, it is trying to get out of the crisis by selling some of its non-core assets. Recently it has sold the Tasmanian pulp mill and its Tamar Ridge winery to enable reorganization by downsizing. The management says that it has “a lot of work to do over the coming 12 months to continue to develop our asset base and the next stage of development which will be the closure of the pulp mill project” (Griffiths 2010, np)

Not sure if you can write a paper on Richard Sennett’s account of the ‘new capitalism’ in relation to current organizations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Sennett portrays the new capitalism as short-termism because it concentrates on insists on flexibility and the relocation of workers from on job to another. This means that there is no need for people to specialize in a particular field all they need is the potential and skill because the economy is moving very fast and so is employers interests. Workers should therefore not dwell on past experience to deliver services any more instead they should be eager to learn the new task.

Sennett points out that “most people need a sustaining life narrative; take pride in being good at something specific; and value the experiences they accrue, and the new capitalism is a source of misery for many people” (2006, p. 256). The new capitalism is as a result of various forces put together hence generating the changes. The first was the change of authority from the management to the shareholders; and the investors are out to make quick profits not long-term gains.

The concept of quick money is not new to the globe but capital combined with pressure for profits is the reason for the changes. The current era views stability as a weak point and a disadvantage; the favored option is innovation, new opportunities and total enterprise. Development of new information technologies is also another major force that has mainly created changes in the way that managed.

Communication and transport is now very fast than before; managers can send orders electronically and expect results at the same speed. This speed is actually not good for business because very many bad decisions are made due to speed and they end up working against the entity.

The casualisation of labor and the formation of unions have made it more difficult to get labor and to manage it too hence organizations ought to be careful when hiring, managing and firing because strikes can be very ruinous for their operations both in reputation and production (Hyam and Janda 2010, np)

The above core changes and their reasons are very visible in the Australians organizations mentioned earlier, they are all geared towards quick profits through investors capital.

The organizations drop enterprises that are not making profits and change to develop the viable ventures, the ones that are doing well keep looking for new innovations so as to maintain their positions. All of these changes also involve the employees hence the need for potential rather than specialty in a particular field because the organizations will be requiring different kind of labor at different times.

The changes could be good for revenues but still they got their weaknesses that they bring in an organization. Sennett argues, “there are three deficits that follow on from the structural changes; low institutional loyalty, the loss of informal channels of trust among employees and the weakening of institutional knowledge” (1998, p. 102). The New capitalism therefore has its advantages and disadvantages but one thing that is obvious is that it is overtaking capitalism worldwide.

References Bain, D 2010, ‘BHP ratings under threat in Potash bid’, ABCNews. Web.

Fraser, A 2010, ‘Retail softness dries up Billabong sales’, The Australian. Web.

Griffiths, M 2010, ‘Greens play down chances of pulp mill deal’, ABCNews. Web.

Hyam, R


Social Media: How has it changed marketing and the thought process of society essay help online: essay help online

Purpose: The purpose of the annotated bibliography is to summarize the sources that you have gathered to support your research proposal project. These summaries help you to think about the complex arguments presented in your sources.Descriiption: In this assignment, you will create an annotated bibliography consisting of seven sources. Each entry will consist of a reference list citation, a summary of the source’s information, and a one-sentence assessment. Each annotation should be between 150 to 200 words. If an entry is shorter than 150 words.


The value and benefit of training employees Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Value and benefit to the employer

Value and benefit to employees

Value and benefit to customer


Referencing List

Introduction Training of the staff is of great value and benefits to all stakeholders involved in day to day realization of the of the company’s goals. In this case the owner, the staff and the customers stands an equal benefit if the continuous training programs are in place.

The employees should be equipped with ongoing training throughout their work lives so that they remain relevant and competitive in their lines of duty. It is a true fact that getting the right professional by a mere exercise of recruitment is not an easy task since various organizations are unique in the ways they carry out their duties.

Thus, this implies that the only convenient way to get the right personnel in a given organization is by training their workforce which is equal to the challenges of a given firm. The misconception that training only benefits the employees is misplaced and unfortunate. This is because training creates an atmosphere of professionalism which is very critical in the success of any given business.

Thus, the training programs should be highly valued in any given organization because they play a key role in determining the destiny of an organization (McNamara, 2008, p. 1). In this case we are going to look at the value and benefits of subjecting the employees to training programs. This benefits and values will be addressed on various stakeholders such as the owner, employees and finally the customers.

Value and benefit to the employer The value and benefit of undertaking the training programs to the workforce is very realistic on the side of the employer. Even though some employers in small scale business may argue that it is uneconomical to fund training programs, the consequences of failure to train are too severe. The value and benefit of employees training to the employer are evident in various ways.

Firstly, the employees training programs lowers the costs incurred on hiring new staff. Under the training programs the firm can get potential candidates who may not have some skills but who are trainable to perform various tasks. Thus, the training culture implemented by the business helps the management spare the time which could have been wasted in looking for the ideal person to recruit (Sigma, 2010, p. 1).

This is because getting the right person is a bit challenging to the employees and thus training their workers is more convenient. Secondly, the turnover of the staff is highly reduced by action of training the employees. When the employees are given a chance to gain and develop new skills, they become happy people because of the feeling of being adequately informed about their tasks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This reduces greatly their likelihood of desiring to resign and leave the firm and this enables the firm to retain great talents in their staffing. Thirdly, the claims from the customers against poor services drastically reduce due to appropriate training given to the employees. This is because the staff takes great pride in its daily undertakings due to confidence gained in the course of training (Jacouwski, 2010, p. 1).

Thus, the customers are happy with the service delivery of the employees and hence the success of entire firm since the customers will be retained. Finally, the employer will be required to undertake minimal supervision to the staff. This is because the employees are well informed about their duties and they are in a position to perform their duties independently without supervision from their boss.

Value and benefit to employees The staff also gets great value and benefit from the training programs availed to them by their employer. Firstly, the mere act of the employer to give the staff an opportunity to gain knowledge and new skills, makes the employees feel appreciated and highly regarded. This fact enhances job satisfaction amongst the employees. As a result, the employees get highly involved in the affairs of the business and their loyalty towards the employer and the business at large is tightened.

The productivity of the firm also increases due to the fact the employees are giving their best to the business. Secondly, the employees are awarded certificates after undertaking the training programs (Kunkel, 2005, p. 1). The employees gain pride after attaining this certificates. Also the employees are better placed in seeking greener pastures since in all interviews the documentary evidence is highly regarded. This makes the employees have a feeling of being taken care of in terms of the career advancement.

Thirdly, the employees are not in mood of leaving a given firm because their needs are well taken care of by the training programs. Thus this ensures job stability of the employees since they are very loyal to the employer and the business. Also it is evident that after effective training the employees become happy and more satisfied with their jobs. This greatly reduces the likelihood of employees leaving or resigning their duties.

Finally, the employees gains new skills which enable them to be in a position to handle various responsibilities in their work place. Also the new skills acquire makes the staff perform their work effectively (Jacouwski, 2010, p. 1). The training programs enables the employees to be efficient and accurate a fact which highly motivates them. This leads to high productivity of the staff and thus the firm at large.

Value and benefit to customer Training of the employees is of critical value and benefit to the existing and potential customers of the firm. First, the consistent excellent service delivery by well trained staff is highly regarded by the customers. This is because the firm is in a position to retain well talented staff for a very long period of time.

We will write a custom Essay on The value and benefit of training employees specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The retained staff is able to identify existing and new customers and ensure that customers are always better served every time they show up (Reh, 2002, p. 1). This makes the firm to be in a position to retain existing customers for a long time and also establish new ones. Secondly, the customers are in a position to enjoy service delivery which is professional. In this case the employees are train on how to explain some services to customers and also listening to the customers issues.

This makes the customer have a lot of trust to the employees and the entire firm. Finally, the customers are always pleased with fast and efficient service delivery offered by the trained employees (Kunkel, 2005, p. 1). This is as a result of self confidence developed by the staff out of new skills acquired during training.

Conclusion It is very evident from the above that training instills some virtues such as listing, communication and being an educator to the employees. These virtues are very critical to the effective service delivery in any given firm. The training programs for employees are usually a big asset in the firm and should at no given time be seen as liabilities. Here we have looked at the value and benefit of training employees to the employer, employees and to the customers.

Referencing List Jacouwski, T. (2010). The benefits of employee development. Web.

Kunkel, D. (2005). Train for success. Web.

McNamara, C. (2008). Employee training and development: reasons and benefit. Web.

Reh, F. (2002). Cross training employees. Web.

Sigma, S. (2010). The benefits of employee development. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The value and benefit of training employees by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Please use the links I have provided to answer the following questions below in the paper. This class is college essay help

Please use the links I have provided to answer the following questions below in the paper. This class is about Urban economics.

Look at the 2020 census data on cities and metro areas. Compare Philadelphia with other large cities. And look for YOUR home or favorite city, too.

1. Compare population growth rates for 2010-2020. Can you identify any common characteristics of the fastest growing cities?

2. Which cities have the highest population density? What characteristics do they have in common?

3. Look at the list of the 10 largest cities in the US in 1900 (note—before the automobile and air-conditioning!), and compare to today. Identify three things that you find interesting about that 1900 list when compared to 2020, and comment on them —what do you think happened?

4. Come up with 5 topics that you can discuss about Houston, Texas urban life and write a paper about.



The Concept of Androgyny and Its Benefits in the Society Report (Assessment) college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Introduction Social psychology is the study of the influence of the genuine, obscure, and the anticipated presence of an individual on the emotions, contemplations, and actions of another. This essay highlights the concept of androgyny and its benefits in the society, and describes situations where an androgynous individual might be suited than either a masculine or feminine individual.

The term Androgyny is derived from two Greek terms, Andras (man) and Gyne (woman). Therefore, an Androgynous individual is endowed with the female and male characteristic traits. Being an Androgyne in today’s society is difficult because one is viewed as an outcast.

If people had a better understanding of what androgyny really is, they might not be so quick to judge. An androgyne is a person who exhibits traits, which are both masculine and feminine. These traits could be either physical or mental or even both. The society should be blamed for assuming that the male and female groups are the only genders.

Some of these beliefs are attributed to the influence of the western culture, which disregards the existence of Androgynous individuals in the society. However, in other cultures, the situation is a little different. Gender is not a choice to be made because it is part of what and who individuals are in various societies. Therefore, there is the need to accept the existence of more than two genders in the society and live with that fact in mind.

Society would be functional and better if more people were androgynous rather than being either masculine or feminine because they have a different perspective towards life. They are able to see things from both male and female perspectives. This benefits the society in the sense that they can perform duties from both sides, and this helps to save labor, time that the society cannot afford mainly because their characteristic traits have no gender value (Bem 114).

There are no specific situations where an androgynous individual might be better suited than either a masculine or a feminine individual (Bem 115). Bern (115) notes that a person has to be either feminine or masculine but not both. It all depends on the situational appropriateness of various behaviors. Individuals are limited in the range of behaviors available to them as they move from one situation to another.

The Bern Sex Inventory theory distinguishes the sex typed person as someone who has internalized society’s sex typed standards of desirable behavior for men and women and these characteristics were selected as masculine or feminine based on sex typed social desirability. Masculine males are thus good in situations that call for instrumental orientation focusing on getting the job done.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since the BSRI was designed to measure the extent to which a person divorces himself from those characteristics that might be considered appropriate for the opposite sex, masculinity and femininity scales were used to determine situations that someone is only capable of masculine behaviors.

A personality characteristic qualified as masculine if both males and females in both samples independently judged it. The masculine sex role represented rejection of female attributes and it is here that masculine behaviors are more appropriate (Bem 116).

Feminine females are good in settings where concern for the feelings of others is important. Similarly, a personality characteristic qualified as feminine if both males and females judged it to be significantly more desirable for a woman than for a man.

Feminine behaviors were appropriate when the females rejected men attributes. Females are known to be more expressive and are more concerned with the welfare of others. In such situations where the community is involved, they tend to be part of it. Females are more concerned with the society as a whole because they believe that it is within their reach (Bem 116).

Some images that are shown by the media can make some individuals to appreciate what they see rather than what is real. Research studies indicate that when an individual is obsessed with the attractive images, there is the possibility that one will loose the psychological attachment with others in the society.

This is because one tends to think that there is a variety of people out there and this makes one to lack the appreciation of what one has and desire what is attractive in other people. In the case of men, exhibiting visions of beautiful women, this can make them to think that their partners are less physically attractive and this can lead to divorce and separation. The images can make people to imagine that there are numerous attractive people in the world apart from those near them (Levine 157).

A pool of alternatives gives the perception that one cannot settle when there are great people out there. Even when it is well known that the women on magazines cover are supermodels, some people still adore them in the sense that they will end up dressing like them. This is one way of not appreciating who one really is and what one really has but instead desire to be like others in the world of dreams.

We will write a custom Assessment on The Concept of Androgyny and Its Benefits in the Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The ultimate implication of the influence of the media on different individuals is that it destabilizes marriage besides making many young men to stay unmarried for long. They prefer staying single blaming the media of their infatuation with the young and beautiful images it displays everywhere. A research carried out by Kanazawa found out that most divorce cases happen because one or the other spouse is dissatisfied with their mate (Levine 159).

Conclusion In conclusion, androgynous individuals should be accepted in the society since they are also human beings and the only difference is their characteristic traits. Whether one is gay, transsexual or Androgynous, it is imperative that the society accords them the freedom they deserve whenever and wherever.

Works Cited Bem, Sandra L. The Measurement of Psychological Androgyny. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 42(1974): 155-62.

Levine, Michael. Why I Hate Beauty. Psychology Today. July 2001. 19 August, 2010 .


Ethics in Design Essay scholarship essay help

Basically, ethics can be defined as the branch of philosophy that deals with the moral principles of a person with respect to the appropriateness and wrongness of particular measures and to the goodness and badness of the intentions and ends of such measures. These rules of conduct are usually acknowledged in respect to a particular class, group, culture, organization or profession.

Every profession as well as organization usually has its own fixed ethical principles which are typically in regard to the mode of operation, the effects of the products or services offered and in the association with clients and stakeholders. Ethics in the workplace of any profession helps in ensuring that a strong moral compass is maintained when there is conflict and confusion in times of crisis.[1]

As in other professions, maintenance of professional ethics is required in the design profession. Professional ethics are referred to as the ethical issues that usually come up because of the proficient knowledge that the professional have achieved and the ways in which this knowledge should be administered during the provision of the specific service to consumers.

Since the professional has obtained more superior instruction in a specific field as compared to the average people, he/she is competent in making and operating on informed information and thus is seen to carry extra moral responsibilities.[2]

A person with this kind of added and superior knowledge is more often than not, accorded more authority and power and the clients often place their confidence on the professional with the belief that the services provided to them will either be of assistance to them or bring profits.

It is therefore relatively possible for a professional to misuse the authority he/she has and take advantage of the clients’ lack of understanding. To avert such client exploitation as well as safeguard the integrity of the profession, there are codes of practice, which all specialists must follow, enforced in nearly all professions.[3]

Generally, there are fundamental principles which constitute the basic make up of a principal. The first principle in the ethical practices of design is founded on the client’s needs and states that any and every action should be first and foremost, client centered. Every designer should make sure that their practice places the customer’s interests before their own.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This means that a professional designer should adjust to the client’s standards in terms of business and design but staying within the confines of professional responsibility and the context of the professional duty. In relation to this, a designer is expected to avoid working simultaneously on assignments that are bound to create a conflict of interest without the consent of the clients concerned. The only exemption is in the case where there is a principle in that trade for a designer to work at the same time for several competitors.[4]

Another basic principle is founded on equality and diversity. Every professional, while practicing should ensure that he/she is promoting as well as demonstrating a commitment to equality and diversity. A designer should ensure that he/she is maximizing the life chances of all the service or products consumers.[5]

Therefore a designer should not in any chance, refuse to offer services to a client based on any kind of discrimination of race, tribe, gender, nationality, religion or social and educational status. Conversely, a professional designer should be underpinned by an obligation to encourage diversity and equal opportunity for all people and wherever there is an opportunity, to rectify the impact of educational and social drawbacks.[6]

Impartiality is another elementary principle in ethical practices of most professionals including in design. This principle states that a professional, designer or otherwise, must make sure that the delivery of any information, recommendation or guidance services should be duly unbiased. In order to attain this therefore, a designer is expected to make clear anything that limits or creates a barrier to their professional knowledge or other things that are in the framework in which they function that may lead to bias or favoritism.

A designer should give a client full and sufficient information about the range of options that are available so that the client has a chance to make a definite and knowledgeable decision. Any design organization should also make its stance on impartiality clear while creating its code of ethics so as to avoid any misconceptions, as well as indicate any constrictions that may limit the variety of options they put before service users.[7]

In addition, there is the principle of confidentiality which is paramount in any codes of ethics of any profession. In this case, the client’s confidentiality is put at the forefront and should be treated essentially with respect. A design professional should make a clear commitment of their intent on confidentiality and should inform their clients at the earliest time possible on anything that may cause limitation to confidentiality.

herefore, every designer is expected to treat any work pertaining to a client with confidentiality and should avoid divulging any of the information in any manner. In this case, that would include the work that is presently in progress preceding the completion of a project as well as any knowledge of the intentions of a client, and details in relation to the work. A professional designer should also make sure that other staff members act accordingly and uphold discretion in their work.

We will write a custom Essay on Ethics in Design specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It should also be made apparent to everyone in the personnel staff that the delivery of a service should be done with respect for the privacy of the client and disclosing any information should only be done with informed consent with the exception of situations that create serious risk to the welfare of the individual or other people involved.[8]

However, even with these basic principles put in place, there is a need to instill them in the minds of the professionals and staff members in a working environment. Clearly outlining the principles does not necessary guarantee that the employees will follow them as required and thus the need for an ethics implementation program.

Presence of an implementation program ensures that the involved members are inspired to put the ethical principles into use and generally reflects on the professions integrity, character and beliefs. First and foremost, it is important to make sure that the principal body appointed to create the code of ethics has a genuine commitment to the ethics initiative and is willing to devote enough financial resources in the development and maintenance of the program.[9]

This way, there will be no slacking in its implementation and progression due to lack of resources. It is also important to assign a single senior supervisor to concentrate only on the implementation of this program. He should be able to visit all organizations whose work entails design and revise and record on the implementation of the code of ethics. He should then keep records, do follow ups and most importantly report directly to the chairman of the program board on the day-to-day aspects of the program.[10]

An independent assessment of the current ethical climate in the profession should also be done through interviews, focus groups and anonymous written surveys. This will make it possible to compare the existing codes to those of the up to date and well working programs used in other professions and accordingly make alterations where needed. It would also be encouraging to professionals to create an open ended helpline in which designers can seek for guidance and direction in relation to the ethics principles.

This should also include a reporting system whereby individuals can present ethical concerns or violation reports. Publicizing the ethics program throughout the profession and encouraging organizations to adopt it would go a long way in its implementation. In addition, the ethics program board should make a point of reviewing the agenda and principles at least one or twice a year.[11]

Bibliography Brenner, Steven N, “Ethics Programs and Their Dimensions”. Journal of Business Ethics, 11, no 4 (1992): 391-399.

Dean, Peter J. “Making Codes of Ethics ‘Real’.” Journal of Business Ethics, 11, no 6 (1992): 285-290.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethics in Design by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Ferrell, Fraedrich


Coca-Cola Company Marketing Dynamics Essay best essay help

Introduction The efficacy in the marketing of a company’s products has largely determined the success of large and medium sized companies in terms of brand visibility, sales and the profitability in the medium and long term. In essence, the managers must understand and integrate the principles of marketing in tandem with the dynamics in the external environment if they are to achieve positive results (Pride


The Evolution of the Personal Computer and the Internet Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Personal Computers

Tim Berners-Lee


Usability Engineering

Beating around the Bush


Usability Issues



It can be argued that the preceding century was the beginning of the Information Age. It can be described as such because of two technological breakthroughs – the invention of the personal computer and the Internet. These two technologies combined, brought another milestone when it came to man his desire to improve the way he leverages technology, specifically the ability to communicate long distances.

The telegraph, radio, and television were considered major breakthroughs in this field but no one was prepared for the coming of the personal computers and the Internet. These two technologies combined produced another ground breaking innovation which is the World-Wide-Web and the creation of a web page and a website. The following is a discussion on the evolution of the personal computer and the Internet from its humble beginnings and how the website became a potent application of Information Technology.

Personal Computers It all began with computers and as the name suggests it is a machine that is expected to make computations beyond the capability of humans or at least crunch a great deal of numerical information that requires a high level of consistency and accuracy.

Using this basic definition then the humble scientific calculator can also be described as a basic example of what a computer is all about. But for the purpose of this study a computer is an equipment of considerable size that was used primarily by the government to perform complex tasks. In the early days a typical computer can be as large as the average person’s bedroom. Truly, there is a huge difference comparing it to the desktops and laptops of the 21st century.

From the very beginning only governments can afford these sophisticated machines up until inventors, enthusiasts and entrepreneurs worked together, either as a team or in direct competition with each other to produce what will be known as the personal computer. A computer that does not have to occupy the whole living room but powerful enough to perform computations faster than even the most brilliant mathematician or the most conscientious student.

However, without the creation of the World-Wide-Web and the webpage the computer will continue to be an expensive toy, affordable only for those who have money to spare.

And it would have remained to be so considering that there are still alternative ways to produce that report or assignment, there is always the trusted old typewriter that can be pulled out from storage and with rudimentary skills in typing a student or a professional can still fulfill those requirements. But when people began to access the Internet and use websites, Information Technology took a decisive turn and as historians would love to put it: the world was never the same again.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Tim Berners-Lee Before going any further it is important to understand the difference between the Internet, the World-Wide-Web, a webpage and a website. All of these can be explained succinctly using the following definition:

The World-Wide-Web is an infrastructure of information distributed among thousands of computers across the world and the software by which that information is accessed. The Web relies on underlying networks, especially the Internet, as the vehicle to exchange the information among users. (Dale


“The Storm” by Kate Chopin Essay best college essay help

The story’s backdrop is a storm that was about to pummel a small town. But the meat of the story is contained in the storm within the hearts of two lead characters – a man and a woman. In order to be more specific, it must be made clear that they are both married but not to each other. Calixta was the wife of Bobinot and Alcee was the husband of Clarisse. Calixta and Alcee knew each other a long time ago but as Chopin had pointed out they were now considered strangers after each went their separate ways and with their own families.

But it seems that Calixta and Alcee could not wipe away the memories of those years gone by when both were attracted to each other. And now, when the storm was about to hit, Calixta’s home was about to become like a garden and Alcee will come in like a snake tempting her and she will give in to that temptation but only until the storm is above them, when it is gone so will the storm within.

There are many critics who find no problem in describing what happened within Calixta’s home and how she succumbed to temptation. They focused on the words used by the author and made comments regarding its daring and it was too advanced for her time (Ward, p.89).

Candace Ward, one of those who studied Chopin up close had the same verdict but just like many others she too find it difficult to explain without a shadow of doubt that indeed Calixta will continue with the affair. It is true that she gave in to her desire and invited Alcee in to his heart but it can also be said that it was a fleeting moment.

The author of this short story, Kate Chopin seems to have the same conclusion because at the end of the short piece she wrote that after the passing of the storm everyone was happy. On the other hand this can be interpreted to mean another thing and it is the happiness experienced by two adulterers who happen to make a connection because of the storm.

Thus, this “happiness” has different shades of meaning (Chopin, par.5). It is different from the point of view of Bobinot the husband of Calixta because he was happy that his family is safe. It is also different from the point of view of Alcee because after the storm had passed it has been clear to him that he needed to see Calixta once again and this helps explains his letter to his wife to extend her vacation for a month or so.

Calixta’s happiness is more difficult to analyze. She is happy for her husband and child’s safe return after the storm. She is happy being reacquainted with Alcee. But she could also be happy that the storm has ended so that Alcee could now go away. Now, whether she wanted Alcee back or not is something not easy to determine. One thing is clear; Alcee will try to find another way back to her heart.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conclusion When the storm clouds gathered and the dark skies warned of imminent danger, people with wisdom tried to stay indoors. But Alcee ventured into the home of his former lover Calixta. And when she unwittingly allowed her to come into her abode she was not fully aware of what can happen next.

Alcee tempted her by holding her close and provided protection when her husband was away. Calixta gave in like Eve who took a bite from the forbidden fruit. But it was Alcee who was ensnared, Calixta seems to forget what happened after the storm and everyone was happy. Alcee on the other hand was happy for another reason for he knew that he has a chance to sneak back into the heart of Calixta.

Works Cited Chopin, Kate. “The Storm.” Accessed from

Ward, Candace. Great Short Stories by American Women. New York: Dover Publications, 1996.


Discrimination, Prejudice and Racism in the United States Essay best essay help: best essay help

1. The society is portrayed as a greatly unjust arena, where someone’s skin color bears his or her credentials. As observed by Dr. King, rampant inequality had infiltrated all spheres of society; furthermore, it targets the minority people of color. They were barred from carrying out specialized jobs, due to the perception that they were unqualified.

A significant majority were of them was hence restricted to service as unskilled workforce. Dr. King employs the analogy of a blank check in reference to broken promises and unfulfilled dreams. He then shares hi vision with the people, where he envisions an equal and just society. This is a society that will allow children all children to associate freely and provide a level playing ground for all, regardless of their heritage (Berry, Reynoso, Cruz


Emerging Issues in Tourism Analytical Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction Background of the study

The tourism industry is one of the largest and most dynamic industries in the world that drives the economies of many countries. Generally, the industry has largest economic output compared to the agricultural, forestry, fishing, mining, and the communication industries.

In this regard, it has the highest growth rates and relatively high volumes of foreign currency. It has also recorded growth in terms of fresh administration and enlightening experiences in the last few decades. All these changes have made the industry to contribute positively to the economic, cultural and social development of many countries.

This has been mostly experienced in western countries such as Austria, France, and Switzerland. Recent studies indicate that, the industry contributes to about 10% of the world’s revenue, besides employing one out of ten workers in the world (Dwyer et al. 2003, p. 1). Despite many countries tending to consider the positive aspects of the industry, many studies indicate that it has both positive and negative effects on the economy, society, culture and the environment.

The tourism industry has a range of economic effects. It has both primary and secondary benefits on many sectors. The primary effects of tourism are felt by the restaurants, lodgings, the retail trade, and the transportation sectors. On the other hand, the secondary effects affect the employment rates, incomes, and sales in many economic sectors of a country.

For instance, in the 2000/01 tourism economic impact analysis in Australia, it is indicated that the industry created $ 23.3 billion in revenues for the New South Wales State. Of the total incomes, $ 6.4 billion were from the international visitors. In the same state, the industry employs about 5.3% of workers, besides being larger than the agricultural, electricity, Government Administration, and recreational industries among many more (Dwyer et al. 2003, p. 1).

Generally, the industry leads to changes in prices, the quality and quantities of goods and services, and property taxes among other taxes. On the other hand, the negative economic effects of tourism are also numerous. Due to the economic interdependencies created by the industry, it influences the economic costs of the local communities in terms of tourism infrastructure, tourism businesses, congestion, and the increased taxes meant to generate more revenue for planning, growth and development of tourism.

As with the economic activities, the tourism industry exerts many cultural effects on many communities. The cultural benefits of tourism are dependent on the native communities because their perception of tourism development will impact the way a community values and sustain its cultural activities or otherwise (Dwyer et al. 2003, p. 3).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Tourism development should encourage the development of the community’s existing characteristics instead of striving to attain standards of other tourism destinations. In this way, the industry contributes to development of a sense of cultural pride when visitors tour the local communities; create an interface for cultural exchange both internationally and locally in addition to creating awareness and generating funds for preservation, conservation and transmission of the local traditions and cultural identity.

On the other hand, tourism can lead to unrestrained, untenable and massed activities that erode the cultural diversity of many communities. These include thrashing of privacy and interruption of the daily lives of the locals, which eventually lead to loss of cultural identities (Honey 2008, p. 23).

Further, tourism can influence the social activities and relations of many communities in different ways. The social benefits of tourism arise from those activities that promote understanding, appreciation, awareness, tolerance, and learning among other activities.

These activities include, promoting self-respect among the locals and visitors, limiting the cultural stereotypes and unconstructive perceptions amongst the two groups, and development of constructive attitudes towards one another, among other activities. However, tourism activities may give rise to many negative outcomes such as distrust, increased tension, and unfriendliness between the visitors and the local communities or between the local communities themselves (Honey 2008, p. 27).

Another relatively important aspect of tourism involves its impact on the environment. This is because the interaction between tourism and the environment can be very complex. The perceived benefits of tourism include construction of aesthetic constructions such as airports, resorts, restaurants, shops, hotels, and other general infrastructure.

On the other hand, tourism can affect the environment negatively when the level of environmental utilization exceeds its ability and sustainability. Therefore, the tourist activities can lead to pollution and depletion of natural resources such as water resources, energy, land, and food resources among others. However, with the emergence of ecotourism, there has been increased awareness on the importance of environmental conservation relative to tourism development (Buckley 2000, p.661).

Sustainable or Eco/nature tourism involves responsible tourist activities in destinations that are easily destroyable, untouched and preserved so as to lower the impact of traditional tourism (Buckley 2000, p. 661). Through Ecotourism, the tourists are educated on the importance of conserving the environment in addition to providing funds for conservation of the local tourist destinations.

We will write a custom Essay on Emerging Issues in Tourism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This essay critically evaluates the emerging issues in sustainable tourism or eco/nature tourism in Sydney, Australia, which has proven to be one of the top ten most visited tourist destinations. It further looks at the problems facing the development of the tourism industry in addition to giving the most probable solutions to these problems. It also provides recommendations on the most probable ways of curtailing the rising barriers and issues in tourism development.

Sustainable Tourism or Ecotourism in Sydney, Australia Sustainable tourism aims at promoting personal growth and education, local cultures, volunteering, and wilderness explorations through traveling to tourist destinations that are preserved and where the local heritage and cultures are the main focus of tourism development (Buckley 2000, p. 665). In this regard, sustainable tourism leads to reduction of the negative impacts of traditional tourism, conservation, and transmission of the cultural identity of the natives.

The initiatives of this form of tourism are undertaken by a variety of stakeholders notably, the hospitability providers, who are involved in the process of evaluating the ecological and cultural factors related to the tourism industry. In addition, the stakeholders are involved in other activities that are aimed at promoting waste recycling, energy efficiency in most of the tourism-related activities, and re-use of water (Barkin 2002, p. 245).

Further, the industry is centered at creating economic environments that sustain the financial needs of the local communities affected by the tourist activities. Formulation and implementation of the policies of ecotourism are undertaken by professionals from a variety of fields such as marine biology, environmental sciences, historians, wildlife management, archaeology, and oceanography among others.

Furthermore, the ecotourism sector is regarded as one of the most growing sectors within the tourism business making Sydney one of the fast growing green cities in the world. According to a study conducted by the World Tourism Organization (WTO), the ecotourism sector experiences a growth rate of 5% annually thereby, generating about 6% of the world revenues and about 11.4% of the total customer spending (Dwyer et al. 2003, p. 3).

The significance of Sustainable Tourism in Sydney, Australia With the ever-changing and toughening environmental regulations and demands from both the government and the communities, there is the need to move from the conventional forms of tourism to a more sustainable form such as ecotourism.

Besides, there is the need for the tourism industry to provide its consumers with avenues where they can benefit from and discover the innate, chronological, and the artistic attributes of various exceptional destinations. In addition, the industry will need to safeguard the integrity of these unique destinations on top of promoting the economic growth and development of the local communities (Tuohino and Hynonen 2001, p. 21).

Through making such observations, the city council of Sydney and the Australian government has developed programs such as Tourism Australia (TA), Indigenous Tourism Australia (ITA), and Business Events Australia (BEA), which aim at providing guidance and ground-breaking strategies for the sustainable development of ecotourism. Implementation of these programs has made Sydney the first city in Australia to achieve carbon neutrality.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Emerging Issues in Tourism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The programs draw professionals from many fields and sectors such as the tourism operators, state and government regulatory agencies, and the associations affiliated to the tourism industry. These professionals have come up with a strategic plan known as Sustainable Sydney 2030, which lays down the principles that should be enacted by the industry players in developing ecotourism, besides attracting huge numbers of foreign and local tourists (Discussion paper 2007, p. 1).

The strategic plan recognizes the uniqueness of the local communities’ connection with the land to be used for tourism development, the history, and culture of the local communities.

Therefore, there is the need to incorporate the city residents in planning for tourism development through involving them in mutual ventures, ownership of projects, and their active involvement in the implementation of policies (Discussion paper 2007, p. 2). This can be achieved through programs that encourage employment, training and involvement of the natives in the management of the tourism development projects.

In the same line, it was imperative that the plan provided avenues whereby the residents could observe promote and preserve their cultural uniqueness and legacy in order to diversify the city’s tourism practices. Through this program, the future of the city residents is brought to the present in that, those affected by the tourist activities are given the opportunity to establish expertise, industry appreciativeness, and industry capacities for future economic development (Discussion paper 2007, p. 4).

Furthermore, the plan is designed to provide equal benefits for the locals relative to visitors and other industry players. These benefits are considered in terms of social interactions meant to promote cross-cultural appreciation, tolerance and enlightenment.

Finally, through incorporation of the city residents, committed partnerships, NGOs, the government agencies, and other stakeholders in the tourism industry, the program is projected to bear numerous benefits, in terms of promoting the welfare of the residents and the city in general. Therefore, it is important that the tourism industry respects and upholds the cultural, land, and environmental attributes of the tourist sites before implementing any plans on tourism development.

Problems facing the Development of Ecotourism in Sydney, Australia Despite that the sector of ecotourism promises a variety of long term cultural, environmental and economic benefits, a number of activities perceived to be problems affect the transformation from conventional tourism to ecotourism. For instance, the city of Sydney and most South Australian cities are facing numerous problems related to development and management of programs aimed at promoting the implementation of ecotourism policies among a host others.

Some of these problems are related to the divergence in perceptions of the whole program (Discussion Paper 2002, p. 1). Many environmentalists are of the idea that ecotourism should involve programs that are nature-oriented, managed sustainably, conservation-based and environmentally sensitive. On the other hand, the government and other industry players are focused at the end product of the implemented policies thereby, making ecotourism equivalent to any other form of tourism such as conventional tourism.

In that respect, ecotourism presents new negative effects relative to conventional tourism thereby slowing its development in many aspects. For instance, ecotourism is one of the fastest growing sectors in the tourism industry projecting a growth rate of about 10-15% per annum in most Australian cities (Discussion Paper 2002, p. 1).

The standards that define this sector include its advocacy for low impact tourist activities, education-oriented, cultural and ecological sensitivity, and the equal distribution of resources between all industry players. Many of these standards are not fulfilled or they are totally ignored in some cases.

Some of the negative effects of ecotourism include the mass displacement of people from their native land without compensation, violation of human rights, and increased environmental degradation associated with the increased number of tourist activities.

A lot of capital and human resource is being wasted in the development of ecotourism, which has shown unsuccessful returns over the years. Additionally, other critics of the program have noted that a lot of public funds are being injected into campaigns meant to derail the general public from the negative outcomes and criticism linked to ecotourism (Wight 2009, p. 3).

Furthermore, ecotourism contributes to a variety of environmental effects directly. In many parts of Sydney and the world where the ecotourism programs have been implemented, the conservation ideals associated to its operations have failed to take effect. Many critics argue that the operations have been more of consumer-based rather than environment-oriented.

They further argue that the conservation claims are meant to encourage further economic gains (Discussion Paper 2002, p.2). Some of the problems cited in this case are those related to the increased number of visitors and activities that demand the expansion of the general infrastructure thereby leading to pollution and degradation of natural resources and population pressures.

The increased number of people also leaves behind large quantities of garbage, besides consuming large quantities of non-renewable energy resources in ferrying the ecotourists to various locations. The ecotourism activities also lead to disturbance of the flora and fauna of tourist sites in that the nature hikes created by the tourists are detrimental to the ecosystem. Therefore, Ecotourism just like conventional tourism leads to depletion of environmental resources, displacement of people, and disruption of cultures.

Furthermore, ecotourism has suffered low city resident’s support and mismanagement in Sydney and many South Australian cities. In a study conducted to measure the level of acceptance for tourism activities in Sydney, many residents felt that tourism development could only be accepted if it was genuine and if it mirrored the local people’s values.

The management of ecotourism is entrusted on the government, which like in any other environment-oriented projects has failed to implement the conservation ideals that are provided by the proponents and policies of ecotourism (Discussion Paper 2002, p. 3).

Solutions to the Problems facing the Development of Sustainable Tourism Since the implementation of ecotourism policies by key industry players have failed to uphold environmental conservation standards, there is the need to create regulatory and accreditation bodies to check the activities of ecotourism companies.

The regulation and accreditation standards should be based on the need to categorize and discriminate companies on the basis of their commitment to sustaining and preserving the environment (Buckley 2000, p. 668). In this respect, the accreditation and regulatory agencies should be committed towards developing procedures that govern the regulatory process.

The bodies need to draw membership from different fields such as the government, travel agencies, airlines, tour guide agencies, and local authorities among others. The criterion for assessment of the company’s conformity with the standards should be based on the environmental management plan in place, the accrued economic benefits for the natives, the extent of community education and training, and the environmental impact created by the company.

Other solutions to the problems identified include provision of guidance and educational programs to ecotourists and the local community at large. This can be achieved through considering the root causes of their activities on the environment such as littering and nature hikes.

Finally, since most of the ecotourism projects are owned and run by large-scale international companies that cause many problems to the locals and the environment, there is the need to encourage development of small-scale, slow growth and local-based corporations to manage ecotourism activities (Barkin 2002, p. 248).

The Suitability of the Proposed Solutions The above mentioned solutions and sustainability programs are suitable for addressing the existing problems. For instance, the accreditation and regulatory bodies will serve to control the level of activities of the global companies owning business interests on the land owned by the locals.

The education and guidance programs will in turn create awareness amongst the ecotourists on the importance of conserving the environments and sites that they visit in order to safeguard the interests of the local communities and the environment at large. Finally, through limitation of the activities of large-scale external or international corporations that engage in environmentally unsustainable activities, the local communities will be given an opportunity to safeguard their environment, besides obtaining benefits of tourism within their locales.

Recommendations Ecotourism, as it can be noted from the above discussions is a crucial program/initiative that can benefit the local communities affected by tourist activities and the nation in general. However, it can lead to detrimental effects on the environment and the local communities if poorly implemented and mismanaged.

Therefore, in order to ensure positive benefits from the development of ecotourism, there is the need to develop and implement policies that work in line with the principles that underlie ecotourism. In line with the principles of ecotourism, it is hereby recommended that:

The importance or the uniqueness of land and other natural resources to the local communities should come first in planning for ecotourism development projects.

Project-planning should encourage the incorporation of the local communities in joint ventures, business ownership, and business management

The local communities should be given the opportunity to establish their skills, industry know-how, and business opportunities relative to the development of ecotourism to allow for their future economic empowerment

The importance of the environment to the natives and the nation should not be overlooked or ignored during the project-planning and implementation stages

Summary and Conclusions The essay has provided an in-depth account of conventional tourism and its impact on the economy, culture, society and the environment. As noted from the above discussions, tourism is one of the fastest growing industries in the world, accounting for most of the world revenues and employment when compared to other sectors such as agriculture, electricity, and mining.

The economic positive impacts of tourism can be divided into primary benefits and secondary benefits. The primary benefits are felt directly by the hotels, restaurants, retail businesses, travel agencies among others. On the other hand, the secondary benefits go to the governments, local authorities, and other regulatory agencies in terms of taxes.

However, tourism can also have negative impacts on the economy through increased taxes and costs that are incurred in developing businesses and general infrastructure to cater for the interests of tourists. The cultural impact of tourism can be both positive and negative in that it affects the culture of the local communities positively through preservation, conservation, and transmission of the cultural identity from one generation to another.

On the other hand, tourism affects culture negatively through activities meant to attain international standards of catering, which erode the local cultural attributes. Further, tourism affects the society both positively and negatively. The positive benefits of tourism on the society include promotion of cross-cultural interactions, tolerance and self-respect amongst the visitors and the natives.

However, tourism can also lead to hostility, aggression and distrust amongst the visitors and the natives. The environmental effects of tourism are numerous in that it contributes to construction of aesthetic general infrastructures, which also contributes to economic gains on one hand or negative effects on the other. The negative effects of tourism on the environment include pollution and degradation of the natural resources among others.

Furthermore, the essay looks at the emerging issues in sustainable tourism or ecotourism in the city of Sydney. Additionally, it looks at the significance of the sustainability of ecotourism in the city. Further discussions provide the barriers/problems that are facing the current development of ecotourism in Sydney and the world in general.

In the same line, the possible solutions to these problems are provided in addition to evaluating their suitability in dealing with the current problems. From the discussions, it can be noted that ecotourism is a fast growing sector in the tourism industry, with the aim of providing aesthetic cultural and environmental features to visitors, while preserving the environment and the cultural identity of the locals, besides giving back to the community the benefits accrued from tourist activities on their land.

Sydney has taken a foot forward in encouraging the sustainability of ecotourism through implementing strategic plans such as the Sustainable Sydney 2030, which is aimed at promoting and protecting local interests in tourism, in addition to ensuring that the greatest benefits obtained from tourist activities go to the city residents.

Reference List Barkin, D. (2002) Ecotourism for sustainable regional development. Current Issues in Tourism, 5(3), 245-253.

Buckley, R. (2000) Research note: a framework for ecotourism. Annals of Tourism Research, 21(3), 661-669.

Dwyer et al. (2003) The New South Wales State tourism satellite account for 2000-01: University of NSW, Australia Website. [online]. Web.

Honey, M. (2008) Ecotourism and sustainable development: who owns paradise? 3rd edition. Washington DC, Island Press.

Indigenous Tourism Australia (2007) National Strategy for Indigenous Tourism 2007 – 2012. [online]. Indigenous Tourism Australia. Available from:

South Australian Tourism Commission Resource Centre (2002) Sustainable tourism development in regional South Australia. [online]. South Australian Tourism Commission. Available from:

Tuohino and Hynonen, A. (2001) Ecotourism-imagery and reality: reflections and Wight, practices in Finnish rural tourism. Nordia Geographical Publications, 30(4), 21-34.

Wright, P. A. (2009) Ecotourism, ethics or eco-sell. Journal of Travel Research, 31(3), 3-9.


Interpersonal and Organisational Negotiation Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu

Interdependence in negotiation The concept of interdependence is unavoidable in everyday life of both human beings and organizations. Organizations depend on each other in the course of their running either economically, socially or politically and this defines the level of their interdependence. Interdependence is an important approach in negotiation as it makes negotiation effective. In the case of negotiation, two parties are in conflict or there is conflict of interest between them.

They have interlocking goals that they may not be able to achieve independently. The nature of interdependence will determine the type and outcome of negotiations which could either be win-win or win lose. For example in the case of bank customer relationship, a customer may be looking for a loan facility in order to buy a building. The bank depends on the customers to earn interest and the customer on the bank to finance the project.

Integrative negotiation Integrative negotiation is a strategy where both parties involved in the negotiation strike a bargain to ensure that they achieve their goals in a win-win solution (Anderson, 2010, 1).

Steps in integrative negotiation

Problem identification and definition. While entering into a negotiation both parties should maximize on identifying the hindrances in an open mind by gathering the necessary information without manipulation to avoid any inconveniences (Howard, 1982, 8). The problem should be well defined on neutral grounds.

Maintaining the problem statement. The problem should not be attached to other linkages that may cause interference in solving the problem and therefore clear guidelines on issues at hand should always be maintained without loosing the focus.

Prioritizing the problem as a goal and find any obstacle attached to it. In defining the problem, any hindrances should be identified and dealt with accordingly.

The other step is to come up with an alternative solution and finally select the appropriate solution from the alternatives. The bank customer relationship is a good example.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Planning for negotiation Planning is very important in negotiation because it will enable the parties involved to be able to organize for meeting and discuss on the issues. Since negotiation is a process, planning on the steps to follow is crucial.

The first step in planning for negotiation strategy is to create a list of wants to address the issue at hand. Then determine the starting point and the conclusion point of your negotiation. The other step is to plan on how to deal with the opposition to every proposal that you make. Then list the benefits you expect from the other party. Finally set the scene where the negotiation is going to take place.

Distributive bargaining Distributive bargaining is opposite of integrative negotiation and parties tries to divide up the disputed interests instead of making the most of it (Howard, 1982, 8). It involves a win lose situation because one party has to lose for the other one to gain or one get less while the other one gains more.

The tactic used is for one party to have more negotiators that the other party so that the other party gives in to defeat. The problem is not discussed on an equal basis but one party outsmarts the other in negotiation. For instance, the government increases taxes in order to improve the economic performance. The tax payers lose while the government at large wins.

Reference List Anderson, J., 2010. The accidental negotiator: how to make win-win work for you all the Time. Available from

Howard, R., 1982. The Art and Science of Negotiation. UK: Harvard University Press.


Hospitality and tourism strategic planning Essay online essay help: online essay help

Introduction A strategy is an action plan that a given organization comes up with to achieve its business goals. This is based so on how different engagements will be linked together to achieve success (Berry, 1995, p. 7). A good strategy helps the organization in achieving unrivalled growth that enhances sales, profitability and market leadership in the long run.

Strategic management is supposed to assist in decision making that will enhance the achievement of long term objectives (Heskett, 1986, p.12). In other words, strategic management is the only way that an organizations goals, missions and visions are specified mostly in programs and projects so that the set objectives are fully achieved. In the course of embarking on strategic management, resources are supposed to be well allocated to help in achieving the set programs and projects.

After programs and projects have been set, there should be a scoreboard that will be used in evaluating if the anticipated targets have been achieved (Kotter, 1982, p.9). Strategic management more so provides the overall direction that an organization should take in a bid to ensure that there is unrivaled success. Those in the management level are supposed to come up with good tactics that will enhance the achievement of the set goals.

This is necessary because a proper framework on how this will be achieved will ultimately be enhanced (Gladwell, 2000, p. 6). It will only be consistent when those actions go in line with what the management expects to get as a result of this process. For a strategic management to be effective and achieve what it was set to, it must follow a process that will enhance this. This is because it is an ongoing process that will have a long term effect on the business and industry as a whole.

Steps Develop strategy ,vision and mission

This is the first step in a strategic management process as there is need to develop a strategy, vision and mission that will give direction on how the whole process will be undertaken. This will ultimately guide and give a roadmap that makes its execution easy (Christensen, 1997, p. 13). The strategy should be in line with the short term and long term objectives. The mission will explain the role that the industry is likely to play in the market. With this in mind it will be easy to achieve the set objectives.

Analyze the internal and external environment

It is important to do an analysis of the environment under which the strategy will be carried out (Hamel, 2002, p. 5). The environment plays an important role in determining if the strategies will be successful as planned. It is vital that both the internal and external environments be looked at to know where to improve on and achieve the set objectives.

In this case, there is need to do a self evaluation so that the internal environment is well understood (Gladwell, 2000, p. 4). To cater for the external environment, competitor analysis should be done to know what to expect. This is also necessary in telling whether the strategies will be successful.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Refine options and choices

Obviously one should have options and in the process make choices in coming up with good strategies in strategic management (Traverso, 2000, p. 15). This is necessary in coming up with the best alternatives that will work in favor of the industry. In refining options, it will be easy to look at the various weaknesses that each option has. After this has been done it will be easy to choose the best amongst the various options.


A plan is necessary in giving a road map that the whole process will undertake. This will provide details on how the set objectives will be achieved (Cokins, 2004, p. 17). The plan will keep the whole process of strategic management organized. This will help in knowing what to do next as the plan stipulates. In the process they will be ahead of time in implementing strategies. This is necessary for success in the long run.


After all this has been done it is necessary to implement what is set out in the plan. It is only through implementation that one can tell if the whole process will be successful. Implementation will be done systematically so that all the steps are carried out as this is necessary for success (Lynch, 2009, p. 17). Proper implementation will lay a good ground for strategic management. In addition, it is only through implementation that the management will be able to know the hurdles that have to be overcome in carrying out strategies.


Evaluation helps in measuring the effectiveness of the strategy that had been put in place. This is in terms of telling if what had been set out was ultimately achieved (Morgen, 2003, p. 17). Proper evaluation can be done by looking at the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats in place. On the other hand, evaluation can be assessed on how suitable the strategy was in achieving its objectives. Feasibility is necessary to tell if the resources were enough in successful implementation of the strategy.

Importance of strategic management in a hospitality business

The hospitality industry needs to have a strategic management process. Strategic planning lies in the value of planning ahead of time so that the industry can perform well. This is because in event that they fail to plan they are planning to fail (Heskett, 1986, p. 9). The industry needs to have a strategic management process for unity, direction and a sense of identity in achieving business goals. Strategic management will help the industry to achieve their organizational goals in an efficient and effective manner.

This is because there is a mission and vision that need to be attained in both the short term and long term. The industry is ultimately continuing to grow and needs direction. With strategic management in place the industry will be able to come up with more complex management structures that are necessary to facilitate its growth and development (Cokins, 2004, p. 13). This can be effectively done with a well laid out plan that has a future outlook.

For the industry to communicate in one voice it needs to have a good strategic management outlook (Christensen, 1997, p. 9). This is necessary in ensuring that the environment that they operate in is favorable to sustain the businesses. The industry is interlinked in many ways and needs to communicate in one voice in a bid to reinforce their position in the market.

We will write a custom Essay on Hospitality and tourism strategic planning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is also necessary as it helps in decision making as there will be well laid down avenues for efficiency (Kotter, 1982, p. 7). Decisions that are made will help in reassessment and implementation of changes that will positively transform the industry in a broad perspective. In addition, the management from various players in the industry will have an opportunity of accessing their performance.

Discussion Hospitality firm

Compass group has grown from a small UK firm to be become one of the worlds leading contract caterer. The company has been growing from 1991 when its value was £250 million (Compass group, 2010, p. 2). It was formed in 1987 after a management buyout. Later on, in 1988 the company was able to float its shares on the London stock exchange market. 1992 saw it launch a client-driven driven strategy. This focused on subsidiaries and food service branding.

The company was able to enter into the US market by acquiring canteen vending. In a bid to grow further it acquired SHRM of France. 2005 saw the company yet in another management buyout in European in-flight catering operations (Compass group, 2010, p. 4). Ever since 2005, the company has been increasing its market position by acquiring other firms and engaging in business strategic moves.

It has a mission in ensuring that it delivers superior services in the most appropriate way. This will be done in the interests of customers, shareholders and employees. Through this, the company believes that it will be able to achieve what it wants to be in the industry. Compass has a vision of being a world class provider of contract catering services (Compass group, 2010, p. 3).

In achieving this, the company has laid out good strategies for service provision with an emphasis on results. This is set to give it a good market outlook as a company that cares for its customers as a whole.

Current strategic effort

To become a world class leader in the provision of food and support services the company has some strategic outlook. Currently the firm has a strategic effort in place for sustainability. Its strategic effort is in setting high standards for responsible business practices (Compass group, 2010, p. 12).

This is in terms of business conduct that involves safety, health and environmental practices. The company plans to be a low cost and efficient service provider to give it a good market outlook. In addition, the company seeks to develop the existing expertise and strength in contract food services.

Environmental elements

The company operates in many markets and as a matter of fact is exposed to different business environments. Internally, it has put in place the right management practices to ensure that its employees play an important role in delivering business goals and objectives (Compass group, 2010, p. 5). That is why they value the diversity and individuality that each employee brings in the company.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Hospitality and tourism strategic planning by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More More so, it operates in an environment of trust which has cultivated good management practices in the group. Through proper management of assets entrusted to them by investors, the company has ensured that it generates active rates of returns. By doing this, the company has always received support from investors in all its expansion strategies.

The external environment has played a role in shaping how the company carries out its activities (Compass group, 2010, p. 6). This environment is important in determining the overall success of its global ventures. Compass has respected the legal frameworks (in countries it operates) by abiding to them. Although there have been some legal constraints, it has soberly engaged governments in ensuring that there is a level playing field.

There have been some economic factors that the company has faced in executing its operations (Compass group, 2010, p. 6). Different countries have different rates of economic growth and the company has factored these in its expansion plans. Exchange rates have varied; this has affected its revenues in a broad way. The company has a good conversion mechanism in place for continued sustainability.

Social relations have been well analyzed by contributing positively to the communities that the company operates in (Compass group, 2010, p. 10). In a more definitive role, the company respects traditions and cultures of the countries it operates in. Whenever the company has had conflicts in relation to this, employees have been well guided on the right code of conduct.

Because technology has been changing, the company has ensured that it conforms to be best technological ways of carrying out its business (Compass group, 2010, p. 8). This has been in all perspectives that business should be carried out for efficiency. Technology should be embraced because failure to do so may end up being costly.

The company has been committed to doing business in an environmentally friendly manner (Compass group, 2010, p. 15). This has been by setting standards on waste reduction, recycling and conservation. It has strived as much as possible to minimize environmental impacts as a result of its operations.

Weakness and threats of the company

There are many weaknesses that the company is exposed to as it strives to continue operating favorably in the market. These weaknesses are very critical for the company to achieve its set goals and targets. The company has been facing a declining market share in the sector and industry as a whole (Compass group, 2010, p. 10). On the other hand, the company has a limited operating margin. Another weakness is that it has a limited liquidity position in place (Compass group, 2010, p. 5).

In addition to these weaknesses, the company has also faced some threats in the course of doing business. The US economic slowdown is a threat to the company’s business. Political stability and regulations have also been seen as a threat to the success (Compass group, 2010, p. 9). A shift in the eating preferences of consumers has also been a threat.


In a bid to ensure that these weaknesses and threats do not interfere with the company’s performance it has come up with the right strategies to correct this.

To correct its declining market share the company has been involved in extensive customer research to know the changing tastes and preferences in the market (Compass group, 2010, p. 22). This has been achieved through proper research and development to ensure that it doesn’t loose its market share. It has also increased its product base to include untapped markets that it did not cover before.

To correct operating margin and liquidity problems the company has had a strategy of turning to investors to finance its operations like expansion programs. It has also reviewed its business activities and operations in a bid to ensure that it returns maximum profitability for effective operations.

The US economic slowdown has affected business as it forms an integral part of its market. As the US economy is slowly picking up it has decided to diversify to other markets. It has mainly focused on acquisitions in the Asian market because it has many opportunities in the hospitality industry (Compass group, 2010, p. 17).

Some countries have had political instability and this has affected its business. In addition, some regulations have also had an impact on its operations. In cases where a country becomes politically unstable for long, the company has opted to end its operations and move to another peaceful country (Compass group, 2010, p. 5). To ensure that regulations are favorable for business it has always negotiated with the government and various industry players to reach an amicable solution and conclusion.

Eating preferences have also been changing and the company has invested a lot in customers care to know what customers want. This has enabled them to serve these customers well depending on what their preferences (Compass group, 2010, p. 21). In the long run, it has innovated new tastes that have helped to serve different tastes.

Results after these strategies were implemented

Implementation of these strategies has helped the company improve on its performance. This is because the company has achieved a 0.9% revenue growth in the first quarter of 2010 (from £6,927m in 2009 to £7,104m in 2009). Operating profit has on the other hand increased by 10% to £504 million from £455 in 2009 (Compass group, 2010, p. 23).

After having problems with operating margin this was corrected and the company has seen a 50 basis point increase in its underlying margin. This was from 6.5% in 2009 to 7.0% in 2010 (Compass group, 2010, p. 24). Free cash flow has also increased by 46% to £354million.This has been achieved despite the challenging economic times that have continued to be manifested over time.

What has led to these results?

These results have been achieved because of a good strategic outlook that was put in place by the management to ensure that the company continues growing on a good profitability path (Compass group, 2010, p. 26). The group has maintained a good operational discipline that has generated momentum in profitability in recent years. It has also used infill acquisitions to ensure that it covers a wide market area.

On the other hand, there has been a significant growth in the food and support services market. The management has relentlessly focused on efficiency as a way of improving its performance and results. The company came up with its own MAP program that has given it a framework to deliver new business (Compass group, 2010, p. 9). With good strategies in place it has won new contracts like Wells Fargo in the US and Deutsche Postbank in Germany. MAP program as their strategy has driven consistent performance across the group.

Opinion Yes

These strategies have been effective in ensuring that the company moves ahead as its performance has continued to grow consistently. Revenue has grown by 0.9% meaning that its market share has grown consistently (Compass group, 2010, p. 23). It came up with a good program that it has used to ensure sustainability. Strategic management theory has a plan of ensuring that the set objectives and goals are planned well to achieve results and this is what the company has undertaken to be where it is.

The company has involved shareholders/investors in coming up with the right decisions that have made it acquire new businesses in other markets thereby increasing its market position. Strategic decision making has enabled it to gain a competitive advantage over other competitors in the market. Through strategic management the company has come up with the right direction to follow in executing its operations.

Conclusion Challenges

There are many challenges of strategic management in hospitality. The first major challenge has been the overestimation of resource competence. Processes put in place to handle the new strategies have in most occasions not been able to handle this. For instance, the process of implementing the company’s MAP program has not been open enough to take off as the management had anticipated in the first place.

This has been manifested from failure to develop new employee and management skills that are necessary to ensure that this strategy achieves its objective as set out in the strategic plan. There has been resistance and reluctance from employees more so in cases where the new strategy is not well explained to them. The hospitality industry relies so much on customer care and experience and in cases where employees are not involved in strategy formulation, they have not been able to participate in its implementation as expected.

Challenges that Compass will be facing in the near future

Compass is involved in contract catering and providing food to the education sector that has specific responsibilities that the company needs to meet. This is a challenge that the company needs to take care of for it to succeed in the highly competitive contract catering market.

Another challenge is the ever changing market dynamics in relation to tastes and preferences. Customers are more informed of their needs and will always demand for new experiences. In addition, the company is involved in so many sectors with many operating companies. This can be challenging in coordination of its activities.

Recommendations to these challenges

These challenges need to be dealt with for the company to continue enjoying unrivalled growth. To deal with many responsibilities from the education sector, the company should develop a healthy diet and good eating habits by involving all stakeholders. This will be achieved through provision of information and promotional activities focusing on a school approach.

Because customers are more informed about their tastes and preferences, the company needs to be innovative in increasing its product range through extensive market research to know what customers want. This means that the group will have to invest in research and development with a good strategic plan in place.

To solve the problem of coordinating its ventures, the company needs to develop an action plan that will help in management and continual monitoring of progress. This should be done against agreed key performance indicators. Monthly monitoring will be necessary for comparison and business review.

Reference List Berry, L. 1995. On Great Service. New York: Free Press.

Christensen, C. 1997. The Innovator’s Dilemma. Boston: Harvard Business School Press.

Cokins, G. 2004. Performance Management: Finding the Missing Pieces (to Close the Intelligence Gap). UK: Routledge.

Compass Group. 2010. Performance highlights. [Online] Web.

Gladwell, M. 2000. The Tipping Point. New York: Little Brown.

Hamel, G. 2002. Leading the Revolution. New York: Penguin Books.

Heskett, J. 1986. Managing in the Service Economy. Boston: Harvard Business School Press.

Kotter, J. 1982. The general manager. New York: Free Press.

Lynch, R. 2009. Strategic Management. Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.

Morgen, W. 2003. Fifty key figures in management‎. UK: Routledge

Traverso, D. 2000. Outsmarting Goliath. Princeton: Bloomberg Press.


The daily life of the ancient Maya Research Paper a level english language essay help

Introduction The Maya are people otherwise known as Mesoamericans. Long time ago, the people of Maya inhabited large cities and urban centers in the Central America; in fact, it is recorded that at a certain point in time, the Maya people had approximately a thousand cities. They used to live in rainforests and mountains; the region that are currently known as Guatemala, Honduras and El Salvador. The Maya people also inhabited northern part of Belize and some regions of southern Mexico.

The Maya of today still inhabit the same regions; however, the large cities no longer exist. From 300 A.D to 800 A.D, the people of Maya considered as a great nation and constituted individuals who were both traders and farmers. Besides, they had a lot o building talents which they utilized in constructing beautiful and attractive temples and pyramids (Sharer